L218 at Document V1.0

L218 AT DOCUMENT
GSM/GPRS+GNSS Module Series
Version： V1.0
Date： 2016-09-29
Shanghai MobiletekCommunication Ltd

L218 AT DOCUMENT
Notice
Some features of the product and its accessories described herein rely on the software installed,
capacities and settings of local network, and therefore may not be activated or may be limited by local
network operators or network service providers.
Thus, the descriptions herein may not exactly match the product or its accessories which you purchase.
Shanghai Mobiletek Communication Ltd reserves the right to change or modify any information or
specifications contained in this manual without prior notice and without any liability.
Copyright
This document contains proprietary technical information which is the property of Shanghai Mobiletek
AL
Communication Ltd. copying of this document and giving it to others and the using or communication of
the contents thereof, are forbidden without express authority. Offenders are liable to the payment of
damages. All rights reserved in the event of grant of patent or the registration of a utility model or design.
ID NQ
All specification supplied herein are subject to change without notice at any time.
DISCLAIMER
TI
ALL CONTENTS OF THIS MANUAL ARE PROVIDED “AS IS”. EXCEPT AS REQUIRED BY
N F LY
APPLICABLE LAWS, NO WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND, EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED,

EN
INCLUDINGBUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY
AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, ARE MADE IN RELATION TO THE ACCURACY,
RELIABILITY OR CONTENTS OF THIS MANUAL.
TO THE MAXIMUM EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW, IN NO EVENT SHALL
SHANGHAI MOBILETEKCOMMUNICATION LTD BE LIABLE FOR ANY SPECIAL,
INCIDENTAL, INDIRECT, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, OR LOSS OF PROFITS,
BUSINESS, REVENUE, DATA, GOODWILL SAVINGS OR ANTICIPATED SAVINGS
REGARDLESS OF WHETHER SUCH LOSSES ARE FORSEEABLE OR NOT.
CO
Copyright© Shanghai MobiletekCommunication Ltd 1

L218 AT DOCUMENT
Revision History
Date Version Description of chage Author
2016-9-29 V1.0 Initial Chen Lei
AL
ID NQ
TI
N F LY
EN
CO

L218 AT DOCUMENT
Table of Contents
1 Introduction ....................................................................................................................................... 15
1.1 Overview ..................................................................................................................................................15
1.2 References ...............................................................................................................................................15
2 V.25ter AT Commands ....................................................................................................................... 16
2.1 ATA ...........................................................................................................................................................16
AL
2.2 ATD...........................................................................................................................................................17
2.3 ATE ...........................................................................................................................................................18
2.4 ATH ..........................................................................................................................................................18

ID NQ
2.5 ATI ............................................................................................................................................................19
2.6
TI
ATL ...........................................................................................................................................................19
2.7 ATO ..........................................................................................................................................................20

N F LY
2.8 ATP ...........................................................................................................................................................21

EN
2.9 ATQ ..........................................................................................................................................................21
2.10 ATS0 .........................................................................................................................................................22
2.11 ATS3 .........................................................................................................................................................22
2.12 ATS4 .........................................................................................................................................................23
2.13 ATS5 .........................................................................................................................................................24
2.14 ATS6 .........................................................................................................................................................24
2.15 ATS7 .........................................................................................................................................................24
2.16 ATS8 .........................................................................................................................................................25
2.17 ATS10 .......................................................................................................................................................25
2.18 ATT ...........................................................................................................................................................26

CO
2.19 ATV ...........................................................................................................................................................26
2.20 ATX ...........................................................................................................................................................27
2.21 ATZ ...........................................................................................................................................................28
2.22 AT&F ........................................................................................................................................................28
2.23 AT+GMI ....................................................................................................................................................29

L218 AT DOCUMENT
2.24 AT+GMM .................................................................................................................................................29
2.25 AT+GMR...................................................................................................................................................29
2.26 AT+IPR......................................................................................................................................................29
2.27 AT+IFC Set TE-TA Local Data Flow Control .........................................................................................30
2.28 AT+GCAP ..................................................................................................................................................31
3 General commands ............................................................................................................................ 32
3.1 AT+CGMI Request manufacturer identification ................................................................................32
3.2 AT+CGMM Request model identification ...........................................................................................32
3.3 AT+CGMR Request revision identification .........................................................................................32
3.4 AT+CGSN Request product serial number identification ..................................................................33
AL
3.5 AT+CSCS Select TE character set .........................................................................................................33
3.6 AT+CLAC List all available AT commands...........................................................................................34
3.7 AT+CIMI Request international mobile subscriber identity ..............................................................34

ID NQ
4
4.1
TI
Call Control commands ...................................................................................................................... 36
AT+CSTA Select type of address ..........................................................................................................36
4.2 AT+CHUP Hang up call ........................................................................................................................36

N F LY
EN
4.3 AT+CBST Select bearer service type....................................................................................................37
4.4 AT+CR Service reporting control .........................................................................................................38
4.5 AT+CEER Extended error report ..........................................................................................................39
4.6 AT+CRC Cellular result code ................................................................................................................39
4.7 AT+CSNS Single Numbering Scheme ..................................................................................................40
4.8 AT+CVHU Voice Hangup Control ........................................................................................................41
5 Network Service related commands .................................................................................................. 42
5.1 AT+CNUM Subscriber Number ............................................................................................................42
5.2 AT+CREG Network Registration ..........................................................................................................42
5.3 AT+COPS Operator Selection ..............................................................................................................43

CO
5.4 AT+CLCK Facility Lock ..........................................................................................................................45
5.5 AT+CPWD Change Password ..............................................................................................................46
5.6 AT+CLIP Calling line identification presentation................................................................................47
5.7 AT+CLIR Calling line identification restriction ....................................................................................48
5.8 AT+COLP Connected line identification presentation........................................................................48

L218 AT DOCUMENT
5.9 AT+CCUG Closed user group ...............................................................................................................49
5.10 AT+CCFC Call forwarding number and conditions .............................................................................50
5.11 AT+CCWA Call waiting ........................................................................................................................51
5.12 AT+CHLD Call related supplementary services ..................................................................................52
5.13 AT+CTFR Call deflection.......................................................................................................................53
5.14 AT+CUSD Unstructured supplementary service data ........................................................................53
5.15 AT+CSSN Supplementary service notifications ..................................................................................54
5.16 AT+CLCC List current calls ...................................................................................................................55
5.17 AT+CPOL Preferred operator list.........................................................................................................56
5.18 AT+CPLS Selection of preferred PLMN list ..........................................................................................58
AL
5.19 AT+COPN Read operator name ..........................................................................................................58
5.20 AT+CAEMLPP eMLPP priority Registration and Interrogation .........................................................59
5.21 AT+WS46 Select wireless network ......................................................................................................59

ID NQ
6
6.1 AT+CPAS
TI
MT control and status command ....................................................................................................... 61
Phone activity status ...........................................................................................................61
6.2 AT+CFUN Set Phone Functionality ......................................................................................................61

N F LY
6.3 AT+CPIN Enter PIN ...............................................................................................................................62

EN
6.4 AT+CBC Battery Charge .......................................................................................................................63
6.5 AT+CSQ Signal Quality .........................................................................................................................64
6.6 AT+CMEC Mobile Termination control mode ....................................................................................65
6.7 AT+CIND Indicator control ..................................................................................................................66
6.8 URC: +CIEV NITZ indicator event ........................................................................................................67
6.9 AT+CMER Mobile Termination event reporting ................................................................................67
6.10 AT+CPBS Select Phonebook Memory Storage ...................................................................................69
6.11 AT+CPBR Read phonebook entries .....................................................................................................70
6.12 AT+CPBF Find Phonebook entries .......................................................................................................71
6.13 AT+CPBW Write Phonebook entries ...................................................................................................72

CO
6.14 AT+CCLK Clock ......................................................................................................................................72
6.15 AT+CALA Alarm ....................................................................................................................................73
6.16 AT+CSIM Generic SIM Access ..............................................................................................................73
6.17 AT+CRSM Restricted SIM access .........................................................................................................75
6.18 AT+CRSL Ringer Sound Level ...............................................................................................................77

L218 AT DOCUMENT
6.19 AT+CLVL Loudspeaker volume level ...................................................................................................78
6.20 AT+CMUT Mute Control ......................................................................................................................78
6.21 AT+CCWE Call Meter maximum event ...............................................................................................79
6.22 AT+CLAE Language Event....................................................................................................................80
6.23 AT+CALD Delete alarm ........................................................................................................................80
6.24 AT+CTZR Time Zone Reporting ...........................................................................................................81
7 GPRS commands(27.007) ................................................................................................................... 82
7.1 AT+CGDCONT Define PDP Context .....................................................................................................82
7.2 AT+CGDSCONT Define Secondary PDP Context .................................................................................83
7.3 AT+CGQREQ Quality of Service Profile (Requested) ..........................................................................84
AL
7.4 AT+CGQMIN Quality of Service Profile (Minimum acceptable) ........................................................85
7.5 AT+CGATT PS attach or detach...........................................................................................................86
7.6 AT +CGACT PDP context activate or deactivate ................................................................................87

ID NQ
7.7
7.8
TI
AT +CGCMOD
AT+CGDATA
PDP Context Modify ....................................................................................................87
Enter data state .............................................................................................................88
7.9 AT+CGPADDR Show PDP address .......................................................................................................88

N F LY
7.10 AT+CGAUTO Automatic response to network request PDP context activation ...............................89
EN
7.11 AT+CGANS Manual response to a network request for PDP context activation .............................90
7.12 AT+CGCLASS GPRS mobile station class .............................................................................................90
7.13 AT+CGREG GPRS network registration status ...................................................................................91
7.14 AT+CGSMS Select service for MO SMS messages ..............................................................................92
7.15 AT+EGTP GPRS Transfer Preference (Proprietary Command) ..........................................................93
7.16 AT+CGEQREQ 3G Quality of Service Profile (Requested) ..................................................................94
7.17 AT+CGEQREQ 3G Quality of Service Profile (Minimum acceptable) ................................................97
8 Mobile Termination Errors ............................................................................................................... 101
8.1 AT+CMEE .............................................................................................................................................. 101

CO
9 Annex C(27.007) ............................................................................................................................... 104
9.1 AT+FCLASS ............................................................................................................................................ 104
9.2 AT+VTS .................................................................................................................................................. 104
10 SMS AT Commands(27.005) ............................................................................................................. 106
10.1 AT+CSMS Select Message Service.................................................................................................... 106

L218 AT DOCUMENT
10.2 AT+CPMS Preferred Message Storage ............................................................................................ 106
10.3 AT+CMGF Message Format ............................................................................................................. 107
10.4 AT+CSCA Service Center Address ..................................................................................................... 108
10.5 AT+CSMP Set Text Mode Parameters ............................................................................................. 108
10.6 AT+CSDH Show Text Mode Parameters .......................................................................................... 109
10.7 AT+CSCB Select Cell Broadcast Message Types .............................................................................. 109
10.8 AT+CSAS Save Settings ..................................................................................................................... 112
10.9 AT+CRES Restore Settings ................................................................................................................ 112
10.10 AT+CNMI New Message Indications to TE ................................................................................. 113
10.11 AT+CMGL(Text mode) List Message ........................................................................................... 115
AL
10.12 AT+CMGL(PDU mode) List Message ........................................................................................... 116
10.13 AT+CMGR(Text mode) Read Message ........................................................................................ 116
10.14 AT+CMGR(PDU mode) Read Message ........................................................................................ 117

ID NQ
10.15 AT+CNMA(Text mode) New Message Acknowledgement to ME/TA ....................................... 118
10.16
TI
AT+CNMA(PDU mode) New Message Acknowledgement to ME/TA ....................................... 118
10.17 AT+CMGS(Text mode) Send Message ......................................................................................... 119

N F LY
10.18 AT+CMGS(PDU mode) Send Message......................................................................................... 119

EN
10.19 AT+CMSS(Text mode) Send Message from Storage .................................................................. 120
10.20 AT+CMSS(PDU mode) Send Message from Storage .................................................................. 120
10.21 AT+CMGW(Text mode) Write Message to Memory .................................................................. 121
10.22 AT+CMGW(PDU mode) Write Message to Memory .................................................................. 121
10.23 AT+CMGD Delete Message........................................................................................................ 122
10.24 AT+CMGC(Text mode) Send Command ...................................................................................... 123
10.25 AT+CMGC(PDU mode) Send Command ...................................................................................... 124
10.26 AT+CMMS More Message to Send.............................................................................................. 124
10.27 AT+EQSI Query storage index ...................................................................................................... 125
10.28 AT+EMGR(PDU mode) Read Message (for phone suite) ........................................................... 126
CO
11 Hardware Testing AT Commands ..................................................................................................... 127
11.1 AT+CASP Audio Sound Playback ...................................................................................................... 127
11.2 AT+EADP Set / Get Audio Profile ..................................................................................................... 128
11.3 AT+EAPS Audio Parameter Setting .................................................................................................. 129
11.4 AT+EGPIO Set GPIO value ................................................................................................................ 131

L218 AT DOCUMENT
11.5 AT+EADC ADC Channel Indication ................................................................................................... 132
11.6 AT+EPWM PWM Testing .................................................................................................................. 133
11.7 AT+ESAM Set Audio Mode ............................................................................................................... 134
11.8 AT+ESLT Set Audio Gain Value ......................................................................................................... 135
11.9 AT+EGMR Mobile Revision and IMEI ............................................................................................... 135
11.10 AT+ESIMS Check SIM Status ........................................................................................................ 137
11.11 AT+EDFT GPIO factory testing ..................................................................................................... 138
11.12 AT+ESLP Sleep Mode .................................................................................................................... 140
11.13 AT+EGPO GPO value .................................................................................................................... 140
11.14 AT+ELNVRM NVRAM write protection ....................................................................................... 141
AL
11.15 AT+ACTTEST PDP context activate or deactivate from EM mode............................................. 141
11.16 AT+ECPI Call progress information ............................................................................................. 142
11.17 AT+ERAT RAT mode and GPRS/EDGE status .............................................................................. 144

ID NQ
11.18 AT+ECAL Calibration data download status ............................................................................... 146
12
TI
STK AT Commands ........................................................................................................................... 147
13 Proprietary AT Commands For PS .................................................................................................... 148

N F LY
EN
13.1 AT+EPBSE Band Selection................................................................................................................. 148
13.2 AT+EGPAU PPP Authentication ....................................................................................................... 149
13.3 AT+EPIN1 Enter PIN1 ........................................................................................................................ 150
13.4 AT+EPIN2 Enter PIN2 ........................................................................................................................ 151
13.5 AT+EPINC PIN remaining attempt number ..................................................................................... 151
13.6 AT+ESMSS SMS status change mode .............................................................................................. 152
13.7 AT+EOPN Read Operator name ....................................................................................................... 152
13.8 AT+CGSDATA Sending uplink data .................................................................................................. 153
13.9 AT +EQUERY General query command ........................................................................................... 153
13.10 AT +EIND Indication Control Command ...................................................................................... 155

CO
13.11 AT +ECSQ Received signal level indication ................................................................................. 156
13.12 AT +EINFO URC Information Control Command ........................................................................ 157
13.13 AT+ECUSD Proprietary unstructured supplementary service data ........................................... 157
13.14 AT+ERFTX Proprietary control RF transmitter power ................................................................ 158
13.15 AT+EBOOT Boot up mode ............................................................................................................ 161
13.16 AT+ICCID Read ICCID of SIM Card ............................................................................................... 161

L218 AT DOCUMENT
13.17 AT+EPCT PS Conformance Test Mode ......................................................................................... 162
13.18 AT+ECHUP Force release specific call by call_id......................................................................... 163
14 Proprietary Unsolicited Result code ................................................................................................. 165
14.1 URC: +ECSQ .......................................................................................................................................... 165
14.2 URC: +ESMLA ........................................................................................................................................ 165
14.3 URC: +ECFU .......................................................................................................................................... 166
14.4 URC: +ESPEECH .................................................................................................................................... 166
14.5 URC: +ESCRI .......................................................................................................................................... 167
14.6 URC: +ESIMS ......................................................................................................................................... 168
14.7 URC: +EUSIM ........................................................................................................................................ 168
AL
14.8 URC: +ETESTSIM ................................................................................................................................... 169
15 SSL/TLS AT Command ...................................................................................................................... 170

ID NQ
15.1 AT+ECERT
TI Install / retrieve certificate for SSL/TLS ......................................................................... 170
16 GPS AT COMMAND .......................................................................................................................... 171
16.1 AT+EGPSC Power on/off GPS ........................................................................................................... 171

N F LY
16.2 AT+EGPSS Send PMTK Command .................................................................................................... 172

EN
16.3 AT+EGPSEPO Set EPO Parameter .................................................................................................... 172
16.4 AT+EGPSTS Set GPS Time Sync Parameter...................................................................................... 173
16.5 AT+CUSGPSC Power on/off GPS ...................................................................................................... 174
16.6 AT+CUSGPSS Send PMTK Command ............................................................................................... 175
16.7 AT+CUSGPSEPO Set EPO Parameter ............................................................................................... 175
16.8 AT+CUSGPSG Get GPS status ........................................................................................................... 176
17 BT Connection Manager AT Command ............................................................................................. 178
17.1 AT+EBTPWR Power on/off BT .......................................................................................................... 178
17.2 AT+EBTNAME Read/Write BT device local name ........................................................................... 178
17.3 AT+EBTADDR Read/Write BT device local address ........................................................................ 179

CO
17.4 AT+EBTINQ Inquiry BT devices ......................................................................................................... 179
17.5 AT+EBTINQC Cancel inquiry BT devices........................................................................................... 180
17.6 AT+EBTVISB Set BT visiable .............................................................................................................. 181
17.7 AT+EBTRNAME Read remote BT device name ............................................................................... 182
17.8 AT+EBTPAIR PAIR BT device ............................................................................................................. 182

L218 AT DOCUMENT
17.9 AT+EBTPAIRCNF Allow or disallow BT pair ..................................................................................... 183
17.10 AT+EBTRP Read remote BT device support profiles ................................................................... 184
17.11 AT+EBTSENM Read/Write security mode, encryption mode .................................................... 184
17.12 AT+EBTOPAD Get device list ........................................................................................................ 185
17.13 AT+EBTSTATE Query connect manger and profile status .......................................................... 186
17.14 AT+EBTENSNIFF Set or get SNIFF mode level ............................................................................. 187
17.15 AT+EBTRSSI Read BT device signal level ..................................................................................... 188
17.16 AT+EBTPACT (De)Active BT profiles ............................................................................................ 189
17.17 AT+EBTCONN Connect BT profile ................................................................................................ 189
17.18 URC: Pair indication +EBTPAIR .................................................................................................... 190
AL
17.19 URC: Pair indication +EBTINQ...................................................................................................... 191
17.20 URC: Inquiry completed indication +EBTIND .............................................................................. 191
17.21 URC: Passive pair response +EBTPAIRRES .................................................................................. 192

ID NQ
17.22 URC: Notify profile connected +EBTCONN.................................................................................. 192
17.23
TI
URC: Notify all supported profiles are (de)active +EBTPRFAC .................................................. 193
17.24 URC: Notify profile connected +EBTDISC .................................................................................... 194

N F LY
17.25 URC: Notify visiablity is changed +EBTVISB ................................................................................ 194

EN
17.26 URC: Notify BT is Reset +EBTRST ................................................................................................. 195
17.27 URC: Notify bond profile fail + EBTPRFBND ................................................................................ 195
17.28 URC: Notify BT devices need connect our profile +EBTPRFAU .................................................. 196
17.29 URC: Notify profile connected +EBTPRFCN ................................................................................. 196
17.30 URC: Notify profile disconnected +EBTPRFDSCN........................................................................ 197
18 BT SPP Profile AT Command............................................................................................................. 198
19 BT OPP Profile AT Command ............................................................................................................ 199
19.1 AT+EOPPPUSH OPP client push files................................................................................................ 199
19.2 URC: Notify when send finish +EOPPPUSH ..................................................................................... 199

CO
19.3 AT+EOPPABORT Abort current OPP transaction with one device ................................................. 200
19.4 URC: Notify when OPP server receive OPP client send request +EOPPRECV ................................... 200
19.5 AT+EOPPACCEPT OPP server decide whether accept push request by OPP client ....................... 201
19.6 URC: Notify when OPP server receive finish +EOPPACCEPT .......................................................... 202
20 BT PBAP Profile AT Command .......................................................................................................... 203

L218 AT DOCUMENT
20.1 AT+EPBPLIST PBAP client get PBH list ............................................................................................. 203
20.2 URC: Notify when finish pulling list +EPBPLIST ............................................................................... 204
20.3 AT+EPBAPENTRY PBAP client pull vCard entry ............................................................................... 204
20.4 URC: Notify when finish pulling list +EPBPDL ................................................................................. 205
20.5 AT+EPBPDLCH PBAP client download call history .......................................................................... 205
20.6 URC: Notify when finish pulling list +EPBPDLCH ............................................................................. 206
21 BT A2DP AVRCP AT Command ......................................................................................................... 208
21.1 AT+EBTA2DP ........................................................................................................................................ 208
21.2 URC: +EBTAVRCP.................................................................................................................................. 208
22 BT HFP Profile AT Command ............................................................................................................ 210
AL
22.1 AT+EHFCLCC ......................................................................................................................................... 210
22.2 URC: Notify when call state changed finish +EHFCIEV ................................................................... 210
ID NQ
22.3 AT+EHFATA........................................................................................................................................... 211
TI
22.4 AT+EHFATD .......................................................................................................................................... 212
22.5 AT+EHFCHUP ........................................................................................................................................ 213
22.6 AT+EHFCHLD ........................................................................................................................................ 214

N F LY
EN
22.7 AT+EHFVTS ........................................................................................................................................... 216
22.8 AT+EHFRVC ........................................................................................................................................... 216
22.9 URC: Notify when call state changed finish +EHFVGS.................................................................... 217
22.10 URC: Notify when call state changed finish +EHFCME .............................................................. 217
23 GATT AT Command .......................................................................................................................... 219
23.1 AT+GATSREG (De)Register GATT Server.......................................................................................... 219
23.2 AT+GATSCON: (Dis)Connect GATT Server to another device ............................................................ 220
23.3 URC +GATSCON: indicate server a connection’s status..................................................................... 221
23.4 AT+GATSS Add/remove a service .................................................................................................... 221
23.5 AT+GATSI Add/remove a include service ........................................................................................ 223

CO
23.6 AT+GATSC Add/remove a characteristic to/from an existed service ............................................ 224
23.7 AT+GATSD Add/remove a descriptor to/from an existed service ................................................. 225
23.8 AT+GATSST Start/stop a service ...................................................................................................... 226
23.9 AT+GATSIND Send an indication to a client .................................................................................... 227
23.10 AT+GATSRSP Send response to a client ...................................................................................... 228

L218 AT DOCUMENT
23.11 URC +GATRREQ: Indicate server that a client has a read request ............................................ 229
23.12 URC +GATWREQ: indicate server that a client has a write request .......................................... 230
23.13 URC +GATEWREQ: indicate server that a client ask server to exec or cancel the write request
indicated (trans_id) before ............................................................................................................................... 231
24 Audio AT Command ......................................................................................................................... 233
24.1 AT+EECHO Echo Cancellation .......................................................................................................... 233
24.2 AT+ ENOISE Noise Cancellation ....................................................................................................... 234
24.3 AT+ESST Set Side Tone...................................................................................................................... 235
24.4 AT+ EPAU Play Audio File ................................................................................................................. 235
24.5 AT+ EPCLK Configure PCM Digital Audio......................................................................................... 236
AL
24.6 AT+ EARST Reset audio setting to factory setting .......................................................................... 237
25 NVRAM AT Command ...................................................................................................................... 239
25.1 AT+ENVGETLID Query LID ................................................................................................................ 239

ID NQ
25.2
25.3
TI
AT+ENVREAD
AT+ENVWRITE
Read NVRAM ............................................................................................................. 240
Write NVRAM .......................................................................................................... 240
26 Compatible AT commands ............................................................................................................... 242

N F LY
EN
26.1 AT+CIPMUX Start Up Multiple IP Connection ............................................................................... 242
26.2 AT+CSTT Start Task and Set APN, USER NAME, PASSWORD .................................................. 243
26.3 AT+CIICR Bring Up Wireless Connection with GPRS or CSD ..................................................... 244
26.4 AT+CIFSR Get local IP address .................................................................................................... 245
26.5 AT+CIPSTART Start TCP or UDP Connection .................................................................................... 246
26.6 AT+CIPSEND Send data through TCP or UDP connection ............................................................. 249
26.7 AT+CIPCLOSE Close TCP or UDP connection .................................................................................... 251
26.8 AT+CIPSHUT Deactivate GPRS PDP Context .................................................................................. 252
26.9 AT+CIPSTATUS Query Current Connection Status ........................................................................... 253
26.10 AT+CIPRXGET Get Data from Network Manually ....................................................................... 254

CO
26.11 AT+CALM Alert sound mode .................................................................................................. 257
26.12 AT+GSN Request TA Serial Number Identification (IMEI) .................................................. 258
26.13 AT+CIPHEAD Add an IP Head at the Beginning of a Package Received .................................... 259
26.14 AT+CIPQSEND Select Data Transmitting Mode ............................................................................. 259
26.15 AT+SPEAKER Speaker and MIC select .......................................................................................... 260
26.16 AT+SIDET Change the side tone gain level ................................................................................ 261
L218 AT DOCUMENT
27 HTTP AT Commands ......................................................................................................................... 263
27.1 AT+HTTPPARA Set http parameter .............................................................................................. 263
27.2 AT+HTTPSETUP HTTP link establishment ...................................................................................... 263
27.3 AT+HTTPACTION Sending HTTP request .......................................................................................... 264
27.4 AT+HTTPCLOSE Close HTTP link ..................................................................................................... 266
28 AUDIO AT Commands ...................................................................................................................... 267
28.1 AT+ZAUDREC Audio function ............................................................................................................ 267
29 FTP AT Commands ........................................................................................................................... 270
29.1 AT+FTPPORT Set FTP Control Port ................................................................................................... 270
29.2 AT+FTPMODE Set Active or Passive FTP Mode ............................................................................... 270
AL
29.3 AT+FTPTYPE Set the Type of Data to Be Transferred ...................................................................... 271
29.4 AT+FTPPUTOPT Set FTP Put Type ..................................................................................................... 272

ID NQ
29.5 AT+FTPREST
TI Set Resume Broken Download .................................................................................... 272
29.6 AT+FTPSERV Set FTP Server Address................................................................................................ 273
29.7 AT+FTPUN set FTP User Name ......................................................................................................... 274
29.8 AT+FTPPW Set FTP Password ........................................................................................................... 274

N F LY
EN
29.9 AT+FTPGETNAME Set Download File Name ................................................................................... 275
29.10 AT+FTPGETPATH Set Download File Path.................................................................................... 276
29.11 AT+ FTPPUTNAME Set Upload File Name ................................................................................... 276
29.12 AT+FTPPUTPATH Set Upload File Path ...................................................................................... 277
29.13 AT+FTPGET Download File ........................................................................................................... 278
29.14 AT+FTPPUT Set Upload File........................................................................................................ 279
29.15 AT+FTPSCONT Save FTP Application Context ............................................................................. 281
29.16 AT+FTPDELE Delete Specified File in FTP Server ......................................................................... 283
29.17 AT+FTPSIZE Get the Size of Specified File in FTP Server ............................................................. 283
29.18 AT+FTPSTATE Get the FTP State ................................................................................................... 284

CO
29.19 AT+FTPMKD Make Directory on the Remote Machine .............................................................. 285
29.20 AT+FTPRMD Remove Directory on the Remote Machine .......................................................... 285
29.21 AT+FTPLIST Set the Type of Data to Be Transferred ................................................................... 286
29.22 AT+FTPGETTOFS Download File and Save in File System ........................................................... 288
29.23 AT+FTPPUTFRMFS Upload File from File System........................................................................ 289
29.24 AT+FTPQUIT Quit Current FTP Session ........................................................................................ 289

L218 AT DOCUMENT
29.25 AT+SAPBR Set the info about ftp and active ftp pdp context .................................................... 290
AL
ID NQ
TI
N F LY
EN
CO

L218 AT DOCUMENT
1 Introduction
1.1 Overview
This document introduces the supported AT command set of L218 project. The target MP
branch is L218 related product and after.
We don‘t suggest using proprietary command in a multiple command. There might be abnormal
situation occurs.
1.2 References
AL
[1] 3GPP TS 27.007 V3.13.0 (2003-03)
[2] ETSI TS 27.005 V3.1.0 (2000-01)
ID NQ
[3] ITU-T V.25 ter (07/1997)
TI
N F LY
EN
CO

L218 AT DOCUMENT
2 V.25ter AT Commands
2.1 ATA
Answers and initiates a connection to an incoming call.
2.1.1 Format
Execution command : ATA
AL
2.1.2 Field
Type Short name Parameter/comment

ID NQ
String text
TI 28800 Connected with data bit rate of
28800 bits/s (HSCSD)
19200 Connected with data bit rate of
N F LY

EN
9600 bits/s
4800 bits/s
2400 bits/s
2.1.3 Response
Execution command : CONNECT

CONNECT <text>
NO CARRIER
CO
ERROR
2.1.4 2.1.5 Note
In UCM project , ATA command will sent to MMI for SYNC

L218 AT DOCUMENT
2.2 ATD
Initiates a phone connection, which may be data, facsimile (+FCLASS> 0), or voice (phone
number terminated by semicolon). The phone number used to establish the connection will consist
of digits and modifiers, or a stored number specification. ATD memory dial can originate call to
phone number in entry location <n> (the memory storage of +CPBS setting will be used.). ATDL is
used to dial LDN(last dialed number) and it will always dial as voice call.
2.2.1 Format
Execution command : ATD<dial string>

Memory dial command : ATD><n>
AL
2.2.2 Field

ID NQ
String
TI
dial string .0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 +. Valid characters for origination
W The W modifier is ignored but is included for compatibility
reasons only, The comma modifier is ignored but is
N F LY
included for compatibility reasons only; Informs the Infrared

EN
Modem that the numberis a voice number rather than a fax
or datanumber
T The T modifier is ignored but is includedonly for
compatibility purposes
P The P modifier is handled (pulse DTMF dialing
functionality)
String text 28800 Connected with data bit rate of 28800 bits/s (HSCSD)
19200 Connected with data bit rate of 19200 bits/s (HSCSD)
9600 Connected with data bit rate of 9600 bits/s
CO
2.2.3 Response

CONNECT <text>
NO CARRIER
ERROR
OK

L218 AT DOCUMENT
2.2.4 Note
The ATD abortability described in V.25 5.6.1 is implemented, except for the ATD memory
dial.Aborting of the command is accomplished by the transmission from the DTE to the DCE of any
character before the response. In UCM project , ATD command will sent to MMI for SYNC
2.3 ATE
The setting of this parameter determines whether or not the DCE echoes characters received
from the DTE during command state and online command state.
AL
2.3.1 Format
Execution command : ATE[<value>]

ID NQ
2.3.2 Field
Type
TI
Short name Parameter/comment
Integer value 0 DCE does not echo characters
N F LY
during command state and online

EN
command state.
1 DCE echoes characters during
command state and online command
state.
2.3.3 Response
Execution command : OK
2.4 ATH
CO
Terminates a connection.
2.4.1 Format
Execution command : ATH

L218 AT DOCUMENT
2.4.2 Response
Execution command : NO CARRIER

OK
2.4.3 Note
In non-UCM projects (excluding Neptune Gemini with BT supported) projects, ATH can only
hang up the call from the same source. In UCM project , ATH command will sent to MMI for SYNC
2.5 ATI
AL
Request Identification Information.
ID NQ
2.5.1 Format
TI
Execution command : ATI[<value>]
N F LY
2.5.2 Field
EN
Integer value used to select from among multiple types of identifying
information
String text product information
2.5.3 Response
Execution command : <text>
2.6 ATL
CO
Set volume of the monitor speaker.
2.6.1 Format
Execution command : ATL[<value>]

L218 AT DOCUMENT
2.6.2 Field

Integer value 0 Low speaker volume
1 Low speaker volume
2 Medium speaker volume
3 High speaker volume
2.6.3 Response
AL
2.6.4 Note
1. Do not use this command several times in the multiple command in the modem load
ID NQ
project because it is not reasonable and might cause unexpected result due to our SW
TI
architecture design. Ex. ATLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLL
2.7 ATO
N F LY
EN
Switch from on-line command mode to on-line data mode during an active call. Returns
ERROR when not in on-line command mode.
2.7.1 Format
Execution command : ATO
2.7.2 Field

String text 28800 Connected with data bit rate of 28800 bits/s (HSCSD)
CO


L218 AT DOCUMENT
2.7.3 Response

CONNECT <text>
NO CARRIER
ERROR
2.8 ATP
Select pulse dialing. (This setting is ignored.)
2.9 ATQ
AL
Set result code suppression mode.
ID NQ
2.9.1 Format TI
Execution command : ATQ[<value>]
2.9.2 Field
N F LY
EN
Integer value 0 DCE transmits result codes.
1 Result codes are suppressed and not transmitted.
2.9.3 Response
Execution command :
OK If value is 0.
(none) If value is 1 (because result codes are suppressed).
ERROR For unsupported values (if previous value was Q0).
(none) For unsupported values (if previous value was Q1).
CO
2.9.4 Note
2.9.4.1 Change History
N/A

L218 AT DOCUMENT
2.9.4.2 Usage Note
If use input ATQ, it is equal to ATQ1 by default
2.10 ATS0
Automatic answer.
This S-parameter controls the automatic answering feature of the DCE. If set to 0, automatic
answering is disabled. If set to a non-zero value, the DCE shall cause the DCE to answer when the
incoming call indication (ring) has occurred the number of times indicated by the value.
AL
2.10.1 Format
Execution command : ATS0=<value>

ID NQ
2.10.2 Field
TI
N F LY
Integer value 0 Automatic answering is disabled..

EN
2.10.3 Response
2.10.4 Note
In GEMINI architecture, the setting of ATS0 applies both on SIM1 and SIM2.
2.11 ATS3
CO
Command line termination character

This S-parameter represents the decimal IA5 value of the character recognized by the DCE
from the DTE to terminate an incoming command line. It is also generated by the DCE as part of the
header, trailer, and terminator for result codes and information text, along with the S4 parameter
(see the description of the V parameter for usage).

L218 AT DOCUMENT
2.11.1 Format
2.11.2 Field

Integer value 13 Carriage return character (CR,IA5 0/13).
0 to 127 Set command line termination character to this value.
AL
2.11.3 Response
Execution command : OK or ERROR

ID NQ
2.12 ATS4
TI
Response formatting character
This S-parameter represents the decimal IA5 value of the character generated by the DCE as
N F LY
part of the header, trailer, and terminator for result codes and information text, along with the S3
EN
parameter (see the description of the V parameter for usage).
2.12.1 Format
2.12.2 Field

Integer value 10 Line feed character (LF, IA5 0/10)..
0 to 127 Set response formatting character to this value.
CO
2.12.3 Response

L218 AT DOCUMENT
2.13 ATS5
Command line editing character.

This S-parameter represents the decimal IA5 value of the character recognized by the DCE as
a request to delete from the command line the immediately preceding character.
2.13.1 Format
2.13.2 Field
AL
Integer value 8 Backspace character (BS, IA5 0/8).
0 to 127 Set command line editing character to this value.
ID NQ
2.13.3 Response
TI
N F LY
EN
2.14 ATS6
Pause before blind dialing.

The command is ignored.
2.15 ATS7
Connection completion timeout.

This parameter specifies the amount of time, in seconds, that the DCE shall allow between
either answering a call (automatically or by the A command) or completion of signaling of call
addressing information to network (dialing), and establishment of a connection with the remote DCE.
If no connection is established during this time, the DCE disconnects from the line and returns a
CO
result code indicating the cause of the disconnection.
2.15.1 Format

L218 AT DOCUMENT
2.15.2 Field

Integer value 1 to 255 Number of seconds in which connection must be
established or call will be disconnected.
2.15.3 Response
2.16 ATS8
AL
Comma dial modifier time.
This parameter specifies the amount of time, in seconds, that the DCE shall pause, during
signaling of call addressing information to the network (dialing), when a "," (comma) dial modifier is
ID NQ
encountered in a dial string.
2.16.1 Format
TI
N F LY

EN
2.16.2 Field

Integer value 0 DCE does not pause when ","
encountered in dial string.
1 to 255 Number of seconds to pause.
Recommended default setting
2 DCE pauses two seconds when "," is
encountered.
2.16.3 Response
CO
2.17 ATS10
Automatic disconnect delay.

This parameter specifies the amount of time, in tenths of a second, that the DCE will remain
L218 AT DOCUMENT
connected to the line (off-hook) after the DCE has indicated the absence of received line signal. If
the received line signal is once again detected before the time specified in S10 expires, the DCE
remains connected to the line and the call continues.
2.17.1 Format
2.17.2 Field

Integer value 1 to 254 Number of tenths of a
second of delay.
AL
2.17.3 Response
ID NQ
TI
2.18 ATT
N F LY
EN
We do not support.
This setting is ignored.
2.19 ATV
Set DCE response format.
2.19.1 Format
Execution command : ATV[<value>]
2.19.2 Field
CO

Integer value 0 DCE transmits limited headers and trailers and numeric text.
1 DCE transmits full headers and trailers and verbose response
text.

L218 AT DOCUMENT
2.19.3 Response
2.20 ATX
The setting of this parameter determines whether or not the DCE transmits particular result
codes to the DTE. It also controls whether or not the DCE verifies the presence of dial tone when it
first goes off-hook to begin dialing, and whether or not engaged tone (busy signal) detection is
enabled.
However, this setting has no effect on the operation of the W dial modifier, which always checks for
dial tone regardless of this setting, nor on the busy signal detection capability of the W and @dial
AL
modifiers. See Table.
2.20.1 Format
ID NQ
Execution command : ATX[<value>]
TI
2.20.2 Field
N F LY

EN
Integer value 0 CONNECT result code is given upon entering
online data state. Dial tone and busy
detection are disabled.
1 CONNECT <text> result code is given upon
entering online data state. Dial tone and busy
detection are disabled.
entering online data state. Dial tone
detection is enabled, and busy detection is
disabled.
entering online data state. Dial tone
detection is disabled, and busy detection is
enabled.
CO

entering online data state. Dial tone and busy
detection are both enabled.

L218 AT DOCUMENT
2.20.3 Response
2.21 ATZ
Reset to default configuration
2.21.1 Format
Execution command : ATZ[<value>]
AL
2.21.2 Field

ID NQ
Integer valueTI 0 Set parameters to factory
defaults.
2.21.3 Response
N F LY
EN
2.22 AT&F
Set to factory-defined configuration
2.22.1 Format
Set command : AT&F[<value>]
2.22.2 Field
CO

Integer value 0 Set parameters to factory
defaults.

L218 AT DOCUMENT
2.22.3 Response
Set command: OK | ERROR | +CME ERROR: <err>
2.23 AT+GMI
Same as AT+CGMI
2.24 AT+GMM
Same as AT+CGMM
AL
2.25 AT+GMR
Same as AT+CGMR
ID NQ
2.26 AT+IPR
TI
Specifies the data rate, in addition to 1200 bits/s or 9600 bits/s, at which the DCE will accept
N F LY
commands. May be used to select operation at rates at which the DCE is not capable of
EN
automatically detecting the data rate being used by the DTE.
2.26.1 Format
Execution command : AT+IPR=[<rate>]

Read command : AT+IPR? Displays the current <rate> setting.
Test command : AT+IPR=? Shows if the command is supported.
2.26.2 Field

Integer rate The rate, in bits per second, at
which the DTE-DCE interface should
CO
operate. Currently, the following

rates are supported:
0, 300, 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600,
14400, 19200, 28800, 38400, 57600,
and 115200. If unspecified, or set
to zero, automatic detection is
selected, and the character format

L218 AT DOCUMENT
is forced to auto-detect
(AT+ICF=0)
2.26.3 Response
Read command : +IPR: <rate>
Test command : +IPR: (list of supported <rate>s)
2.27 AT+IFC Set TE-TA Local Data Flow Control
AL
AT+IFC Set TE-TA Local Data Flow Control
Test Command Response

ID NQ
AT+IFC=? TI +IFC: (0-2),(0-2)
OK
N F LY
Read Command Response

EN
AT+ IFC?
This parameter setting determines the data flow
control on the serial interface for data mode.
OK
Or
Error
Write Command Response
AT+IFC=[<dce_by_dte>[,<dte_by_
dce>]] OK
Or
CO
ERROR
Reference Note
Parameters

L218 AT DOCUMENT
Parameters are defined below:
Parameters Description
<dce_by_dte> Specifies the method will be used by TE at receive of data
from TA
0 No flow control
1 Software flow control
2 Hardware flow control
<dte_by_dce> Specifies the method will be used by TA at receive of data
from TE
0 No flow control 批注 [11]: 1112222
1 Software flow control
2 Hardware flow control
AL
Example:
Commands Response
ID NQ
AT+IFC?
TI +IFC: 0, 0
OK
N F LY
EN
2.28 AT+GCAP
Request complete capabilities list.
2.28.1 Format
Execution command : AT+GCAP

Test command : AT+GCAP=? Shows if the command is supported.
2.28.2 Response
Execution command : +GCAP: +FCLASS, +CGSM

CO
OK
Test command : OK

L218 AT DOCUMENT
3 General commands
3.1 AT+CGMI Request manufacturer identification
The command causes the phone to return one or more lines of information text <manufacturer>
which is intended to permit the user of the ITAE/ETAE to identify the manufacturer of the phone to
which it is connected to.
3.1.1 Format
AL
Command Possible response(s)
+CGMI <manufacturer>
+CME ERROR: <err>
ID NQ
+CGMI=? TI
3.2 AT+CGMM Request model identification
N F LY
EN
The command causes the phone to return one or more lines of information text <model>
which is intended to permit the user of the ITAE/ETAE to identify the specific model of phone
to which it is connected to.
3.2.1 Format

+CGMM <model>
+CME ERROR: <err>
+CGMM=?
3.3 AT+CGMR Request revision identification

CO
The command causes the phone to return a string containing information regarding SW
version.
3.3.1 Format

L218 AT DOCUMENT
+CGMR <revision>
+CME ERROR: <err>
+CGMR=?
3.4 AT+CGSN Request product serial number identification
Returns the IMEI number of the phone.
3.4.1 Format
AL
+CGSN <serial number> <CR><LF>
<IMEI>
+CME ERROR: <err>
+CGSN=?
ID NQ
3.5 AT+CSCS
TI Select TE character set
N F LY
Set command informs TA which character set <chset> is used by the TE. TA is then able to
EN
convert character strings correctly between TE and MT character sets.
3.5.1 Format

+CSCS=[<chset>]
+CSCS? +CSCS: <chset>
+CSCS=? +CSCS: (list of supported <chset>s)
3.5.2 Field
"GSM" GSM 7 bit default alphabet (3GPP TS 23.038); this setting causes easily software
CO
flow control (XON/XOFF) problems

"HEX" character strings consist only of hexadecimal numbers from 00 to FF; e.g. "032FE6"
equals three 8-bit characters with decimal values 3, 47 and 230; no conversions to
the original MT character set shall be done.
"IRA" international reference alphabet (ITU-T T.50 [13])
"PCCP437" PC character set Code Page 437
"UCS2" 16-bit universal multiple-octet coded character set (ISO/IEC10646 [32]); UCS2 character

L218 AT DOCUMENT
strings are converted to hexadecimal numbers from 0000 to FFFF; e.g. "004100620063"
equals three 16-bit characters with decimal values 65, 98 and 99
"8859-1" ISO 8859 Latin character set
"UCS2_08X1" The supported parameters are subject to change according to different compile
directives (options).
3.6 AT+CLAC List all available AT commands
Execution command causes the MT to return one or more lines of AT Commands.

Note: This command only returns the AT commands that are available for the user.
3.6.1 Format
AL
+CLAC <AT
Command1>[<CR><LF>
ID NQ
<AT Command2>[…]]
TI
+CME ERROR: <err>
+CLAC=? +CME ERROR: <err>
N F LY
3.6.2 Field
EN
<AT Command>:
Defines the AT command including the prefix AT. Text shall not contain the sequence
0<CR> or OK<CR>
3.6.3 Note
The command is available from 09B.1009MP
3.6.3.2 Usage Note

CO
The command only supported in projects with __CLAC_SUPPORT__ option.
3.7 AT+CIMI Request international mobile subscriber identity
Execution command causes the TA to return <IMSI>, which is intended to permit the TE to
identify the individual SIM which is attached to ME. Refer [1] 9.2 for possible <err> values.
L218 AT DOCUMENT
3.7.1 Format

+CIMI <IMSI>
+CME ERROR: <err>
+CIMI=?
AL
ID NQ
TI
N F LY
EN
CO

L218 AT DOCUMENT
4 Call Control commands
4.1 AT+CSTA Select type of address
Selects the type of number for further dialing commands (D) according to GSM/UMTS
specifications.
4.1.1 Format
AL
+CSTA=[<type>]
+CSTA? +CSTA: <type>
+CSTA=? +CSTA: (list of supported <type>s)
ID NQ
4.1.2 Field
TI
N F LY
<type>: type of address octet in integer format (refer 3GPP TS 24.008 [8] subclause 10.5.4.7);
EN
default 145 when dialing string includes international access code character "+", otherwise 129
4.1.3 Note
If ‗+‘ appears at the beginning of <dial string>, the TON to network is set to 145, otherwise we
use the setting of +CSTA.
4.2 AT+CHUP Hang up call
Request to hang up the current GSM call.
4.2.1 Format
CO

+CHUP
+CHUP=?

L218 AT DOCUMENT
4.2.2 Note
In non-UCM projects (excluding Neptune Gemini with BT supported) projects, AT+CHUP can
only hang up the call from the same source. In UCM project , this command will sent to MMI for
SYNC
4.3 AT+CBST Select bearer service type
Selects the bearer service <name> with the data rate <speed>, and the connection element <ce>
to be used when data calls are made. Values may also be used during mobileterminated data-call
setup, especially in the case of single numbering-scheme calls.
AL
4.3.1 Format

+CBST=[<speed>[,<name>[,<ce>]]]
ID NQ
+CBST? +CBST: <speed>,<name>,<ce>
+CBST=?
TI +CBST: (list of supported
<speed>s),(list of supported
<name>s),(list of supported <ce>s)
N F LY
EN
4.3.2 Field
<speed>:
0 auto bauding (automatic selection of the speed; this setting is possible in case of 3.1
kHz modem and non-transparent service)
4 2400 bps (V.22bis)
5 2400 bps (V.26ter)
6 4800 bps (V.32)
7 9600 bps (V.32)
12 9600 bps (V.34)
14 14400 bps (V.34)
68 2400 bps (V.110 or X.31 flag stuffing)
CO

134 64000 bps(multimedia)
[NOTE] when <speed> = 4,5,6,7,12,14 , line type = Analog
when <speed> =68,70,71,75 , line type = ISDN
<name>:
0 data circuit asynchronous (UDI or 3.1 kHz modem)

L218 AT DOCUMENT
1 data circuit synchronous (UDI or 3.1 kHz modem)

2 PAD Access (asynchronous) (UDI)
3 Packet Access (synchronous) (UDI)
4 data circuit asynchronous (RDI)
<ce>:
0 transparent
1 non-transparent
2 both, transparent preferred
3 both, non-transparent preferred
Note: the valid parameter might have some differences due to the capability and the
configuration of that
project.
4.3.3 Note
AL
<name> = 2 and 3 are not supported
.
ID NQ
TI
4.4 AT+CR Service reporting control
Service reporting control.

N F LY
Set command controls whether or not intermediate result code +CR: <serv> is returned from the
EN
TA to the TE. If enabled, the intermediate result code is transmitted at the point during
connect negotiation at which the TA has determined which speed and quality of service will be
used, before any error control or data compression reports are transmitted, and before the
intermediate result code CONNECT is transmitted.
4.4.1 Format

+CR=[<mode>]
+CR? +CR: <mode>
+CR=? +CR: (list of supported <mode>s)
CO
4.4.2 Field
<mode>:
0 disables reporting
1 enables reporting
<serv>:
ASYNC asynchronous transparent

L218 AT DOCUMENT
SYNC synchronous transparent

REL ASYNC asynchronous non-transparent
REL SYNC synchronous non-transparent
4.5 AT+CEER Extended error report
Execution command causes the TA to return one or more lines of information text <report>,
which offer the user of the TA an extended report of the reason for
- the failure in the last unsuccessful call setup (originating or answering) or in-call modification;
- the last call release;
4.5.1 Format
AL
+CEER +CEER: <cause>, <report>
+CEER=?
ID NQ
4.5.2 Field
TI
N F LY
<cause>: cause value listed in GSM 04.08 annex H.

EN
<report>: string type describes cause value.
Note: For error cause other than those listed in GSM 04.08 annex H.
+CEER: 128 ,"ERROR_CAUSE_UNKNOWN" will be given.
If there is no error happened , +CEER: 0 ,"NONE" will be given.
4.6 AT+CRC Cellular result code
Set command controls whether or not the extended format of incoming call indication or
GPRS network request for PDP context activation is used. When enabled, an incoming call is
indicated to the TE with unsolicited result code +CRING: <type> instead of the normal RING.
4.6.1 Format
CO

+CRC=[<mode>]
+CRC? +CRC: <mode>
+CRC=? +CRC: (list of supported <mode>s)

L218 AT DOCUMENT
4.6.2 Field
<mode>:
0 disables extended format
1 enables extended format
<type>:
ASYNC asynchronous transparent
SYNC synchronous transparent
REL ASYNC asynchronous non-transparent
REL SYNC synchronous non-transparent
FAX facsimile (TS 62)
VOICE normal voice (TS 11)
VOICE/XXX voice followed by data (BS 81)
AL
(XXX is ASYNC, SYNC, REL ASYNC or REL SYNC)
ALT VOICE/XXX alternating voice/data, voice first (BS 61)
ALT XXX/VOICE alternating voice/data, data first (BS 61)
ALT VOICE/FAX alternating voice/fax, voice first (TS 61)
ID NQ
ALT FAX/VOICE alternating voice/fax, fax first (TS 61).
TI
GPRS GPRS network request for PDP context activation
4.7 AT+CSNS Single Numbering Scheme

N F LY
EN
Set command selects the bearer or teleservice to be used when mobile terminated single
numbering scheme call is established. Parameter values set with +CBST command shall be
used when <mode> equals to a data service.
4.7.1 Format

+CSNS=[<mode>]
+CSNS? +CSNS: <mode>
+CSNS=? +CSNS: (list of supported <mode>s)
4.7.2 Field
CO
<mode>:
0 voice
1 alternating voice/fax, voice first (TS 61)
2 fax (TS 62)
3 alternating voice/data, voice first (BS 61)
4 data

L218 AT DOCUMENT
5 alternating voice/fax, fax first (TS 61)

6 alternating voice/data, data first (BS 61)
7 voice followed by data (BS 81)
4.8 AT+CVHU Voice Hangup Control
Set command selects whether ATH or "drop DTR" shall cause a voice connection to be
disconnected or not. By voice connection is also meant alternating mode calls that are
currently in voice mode.
4.8.1 Format
AL
+CVHU=[<mode>]
+CVHU? +CVHU:<mode>
+CVHU=? +CVHU:(list of supported <mode>s)
ID NQ
4.8.2 Field
TI
N F LY
<mode>:
EN
0 - "Drop DTR" ignored but OK response given. ATH disconnects.
1 - "Drop DTR" and ATH ignored but OK response given.
CO

L218 AT DOCUMENT
5 Network Service related commands
5.1 AT+CNUM Subscriber Number
returns the MSISDNs related to the subscriber (this information can be stored in the
SIM/UICC or in the MT).
5.1.1 Format
AL
+CNUM +CNUM:
[<alpha1>],<number1>,<type1>
[<CR><LF>+CNUM:
ID NQ
[<alpha2>],<number2>,<type2>]
+CNUM=?
TI
[...]]
+CME ERROR: <err>
N F LY
EN
5.2 AT+CREG Network Registration
Set command controls the presentation of an unsolicited result code +CREG: <stat> when
<n>=1 and there is a change in the MT network registration status, or code +CREG:
<stat>[,<lac>,<ci>[,<AcT>]] when <n>=2 and there is a change of the network cell.
Read command returns the status of result code presentation and an integer <stat> which
shows whether the network has currently indicated the registration of the MT. Location
information elements <lac>,<ci> and <Act> are returned only when <n>=2 and MT is
registered in the network.
5.2.1 Format

CO
+CREG=[<n>]
+CREG? +CREG:
<n>,<stat>[,<lac>,<ci>[,<Act>]]
+CME ERROR: <err>
+CREG=? +CREG: (list of supported <n>s)

L218 AT DOCUMENT
5.2.2 Field
<n>:
0 disable network registration unsolicited result code
1 enable network registration unsolicited result code +CREG: <stat>
2 enable network registration and location information unsolicited result code
+CREG: <stat>[,<lac>,<ci>,[<Act>]]
<stat>:
0 not registered, MT is not currently searching a new operator to register to
1 registered, home network
2 not registered, but MT is currently searching a new operator to register to
3 registration denied
4 unknown
AL
5 registered, roaming
<lac>: string type; two byte location area code in hexadecimal format (e.g. "00C3" equals 195
in decimal)
<ci>: string type; four byte cell ID in hexadecimal format
ID NQ
<Act>: TI
0 GSM
2 UTRAN
3 GSM w/EGPRS
N F LY
4 UTRAN w/HSDPA
EN
5 UTRAN w/HSUPA
6 UTRAN w/HSDPA and HSUPA
5.2.3 Note
<Act> is applied from 09A.0920MP
5.2.3.2 Usage Note
N/A
CO
5.3 AT+COPS Operator Selection
Set command forces an attempt to select and register the GSM/UMTS network operator. If the
selected operator is not available, ERROR is returned.
Read command returns the current mode, the currently selected operator.
Test command returns operator list present in the network.

L218 AT DOCUMENT
5.3.1 Format

+COPS=<mode>[,<forma +CME ERROR: <err>
t>,<oper>[,<Act>]]
+COPS? +COPS: <mode>[,<format>,<oper>]
+CME ERROR: <err>
+COPS=? +COPS: [list of supported (<stat>,long
alphanumeric
<oper>
,short alphanumeric <oper>,numeric
<oper>,[,<Act>])s]
[,,(list of supported <mode>s),(list of
AL
supported
<format>s)]
+CME ERROR: <err>
ID NQ
5.3.2 Field
TI
<mode>:
N F LY
0 automatic (<oper> field is ignored)

EN
1 manual (<oper> field shall be present)
2 deregister from network (disable form 05.48)
3 set only <format> (for read command +COPS?), do not attempt
registration/deregistration
<format>:
0 long format alphanumeric <oper>
1 short format alphanumeric <oper>
2 numeric <oper>
<oper>: string type
<stat>:
0 unknown
1 available
2 current
3 forbidden
CO
<Act>
0 GSM
2 UTRAN

L218 AT DOCUMENT
5.3.3 Note
N/A
5.3.3.2 Usage Note
We DO NOT support full set of alphanumeric format of <oper>, since the code size
will become very large. If the customer needs the alphanumeric format, the table
can be customized in mcu\custom\common\customer_operator_names.c.
+COPS? response is not alphanumeric format when setting with alphanumeric format
AL
example:
+COPS: 0,0," KG Telecom Co."
If you got +COPS: 0,0,"46688"
This is possibly due to there is no alphanumeric format name mapping to the operator id
ID NQ
----------------------------------------------------------------------
TI
You can define operator name table in the following file under custom folder.
mcu\custom\common\customer_operator_name.c
Please check if there is operator name mapping in the name table.
If not , Please add your operator name and operator id
N F LY
EN
There is comment information in the file to guide you .
Please read the guide before modification.
After modification .then 'remake custom'
There are two places shall be modified
1. RMMI_PLMN_NAME_ENTRIES
2. rmmi_plmn_table
<mode>=2 supported in projects with __NW_DETACH_SUPPORT__ option. (available
after W1012)
5.4 AT+CLCK Facility Lock
Execute command is used to lock, unlock or interrogate a ME or a network facility <fac>.
5.4.1 Format
CO

+CLCK=<fac>,<mode>[,<passwd>[ +CME ERROR: <err>
,<class>]] when <mode>=2 and command successful:
+CLCK: <status>[,<class1>
[<CR><LF>+CLCK: <status>,<class2>
[...]]
L218 AT DOCUMENT
+CLCK=? +CLCK: (list of supported <fac>s)

+CME ERROR: <err>
5.4.2 Field
<fac> : "PF","SC","AO","OI","OX","AI","IR","AB","AG","AC","PN","PU","PP","PC"
<mode>:
0 unlock
1 lock
2 query status (only "SC", "AO", "OI", "OX", "AI", "IR" support query mode)
<status>:
0 not active
AL
1 active
<passwd>: string type
<classx> is a sum of integers each representing a class of information (default 7):
1 voice (telephony)
ID NQ
2 data (refers to all bearer services)
TI
4 fax (facsimile services)
8 short message service
16 data circuit sync
32 data circuit async
N F LY
64 dedicated packet access

EN
128 dedicated PAD access
5.4.3 Note
N/A
5.4.3.2 Usage Note
The <fac> "AB", "AG" and "AC" are applicable only for <mode>=0
CO
5.5 AT+CPWD Change Password
Action command sets a new password for the facility lock function defined by command
Facility Lock +CLCK..

L218 AT DOCUMENT
5.5.1 Format

+CPWD=<fac>,<oldpwd>,<newpwd> +CME ERROR: <err>
+CPWD=? +CPWD: list of supported
(<fac>,<pwdlength>)s
+CME ERROR: <err>
5.5.2 Field
<fac>:
"P2" SIM PIN2
AL
refer Facility Lock +CLCK for other values
<oldpwd>, <newpwd>: string type;

ID NQ
<pwdlength>: integer type maximum length of the password for the facility
TI
5.6 AT+CLIP Calling line identification presentation
N F LY
Requests calling line identification. Determines if the +CLIP unsolicited result code is activated.
EN
When the presentation of the CLI at the TE is enabled (and calling subscriber allows), +CLIP:
<number>,<type>[,<subaddr>,<satype>] response is returned after
every RING.
5.6.1 Format

+CLIP=[<n>]
+CLIP? +CLIP: <n>,<m>
+CLIP=? +CLIP: (list of supported <n>s)
5.6.2 Field
CO
<n> (parameter sets/shows the result code presentation status to the TE):
0 disable
1 enable
<m> (parameter shows the subscriber CLIP service status in the network):
0 CLIP not provisioned
1 CLIP provisioned
2 unknown (e.g. no network, etc.)
L218 AT DOCUMENT
<number>: string type phone number of format specified by <type>

<type>: type of address octet in integer format (refer TS 24.008 [8] subclause 10.5.4.7)
<subaddr>: string type subaddress of format specified by <satype>
<satype>: type of subaddress octet in integer format (refer TS 24.008 [8] subclause 10.5.4.8)
5.7 AT+CLIR Calling line identification restriction
Requests calling line identification restriction.
5.7.1 Format

+CLIR=[<n>]
AL
+CLIR? +CLIR: <n>,<m>
+CLIR=? +CLIR: (list of supported <n>s)
ID NQ
5.7.2 Field
TI
<n> (parameter sets the adjustment for outgoing calls):
N F LY
0 presentation indicator is used according to the subscription of the CLIR service

EN
1 CLIR invocation
2 CLIR suppression
<m> (parameter shows the subscriber CLIR service status in the network):
0 CLIR not provisioned
1 CLIR provisioned in permanent mode
3 CLIR temporary mode presentation restricted
4 CLIR temporary mode presentation allowed
5.8 AT+COLP Connected line identification presentation
This command refers to the GSM/UMTS supplementary service COLP (Connected Line
Identification Presentation) that enables a calling subscriber to get the connected line identity
(COL) of the called party after setting up a mobile originated call. The command enables or
CO
disables the presentation of the COL at the TE. It has no effect on the execution of the
supplementary service COLR in the network.
When enabled (and called subscriber allows), +COLP:
<number>,<type>[,<subaddr>,<satype> [,<alpha>]] intermediate result code is
returned from TA to TE before any +CR or V.250 [14] responses.

L218 AT DOCUMENT
5.8.1 Format

+COLP=[<n>]
+COLP? +COLP: <n>,<m>
+COLP=? +COLP: (list of supported <n>s)
5.8.2 Field
<n> (parameter sets/shows the result code presentation status to the TE):
0 disable
1 enable
AL
<m> (parameter shows the subscriber COLP service status in the network):
0 COLP not provisioned
1 COLP provisioned
ID NQ
TI
<number>, <type>, <subaddr>, <satype>, <alpha>: refer +CLIP
5.9 AT+CCUG Closed user group

N F LY
EN
This command allows control of the Closed User Group supplementary service.
Set command enables the served subscriber to select a CUG index, to suppress the Outgoing
Access (OA), and to suppress the preferential CUG.
5.9.1 Format

+CCUG=[<n>[,<index>[,<info>]]]
+CCUG? +CCUG: <n>,<index>,<info>
+CCUG=?
5.9.2 Field
CO
<n>:
0 disable CUG temporary mode
1 enable CUG temporary mode
<index>:
0...9 CUG index
10 no index (preferred CUG taken from subscriber data)
<info>:
L218 AT DOCUMENT
0 no information
1 suppress OA
2 suppress preferential CUG
3 suppress OA and preferential CUG
5.10 AT+CCFC Call forwarding number and conditions
Sets the call forwarding number and conditions. Registration, erasure, activation, deactivation
and status query operations are supported.
5.10.1 Format
AL
+CCFC=<reason>,<mode> +CME ERROR: <err>
[,<number> when <mode>=2 and command
[,<type> successful:
ID NQ
[,<class> TI +CCFC:
[,<subaddr> <status>,<class1>[,<number>,<type>
[,<satype> [,<subaddr>,<satype>[,<time>]]][
[,<time>]]]]]] <CR><LF>+CCFC:
<status>,<class2>[,<number>,<type>
N F LY
[,<subaddr>,<satype>[,<time>]]]
EN
[...]]
+CCFC=? +CCFC: (list of supported <reason>s)
5.10.2 Field
<reason>:
0 unconditional
1 mobile busy
2 no reply
3 not reachable
4 all call forwarding (refer 3GPP TS 22.030 [19])
5 all conditional call forwarding (refer 3GPP TS 22.030 [19])
CO
<mode>:
0 disable
1 enable
2 query status
3 registration
4 erasure
<number>: string type phone number of forwarding address in format specified by <type>
<type>: type of address
L218 AT DOCUMENT

<satype>: type of subaddress octet in integer format (refer TS 24.008 [8] subclause 10.5.4.8);
default 128
1 voice (telephony)
<time>:
1...30 when "no reply" is enabled or queried, this gives the time in seconds to wait before
AL
call is forwarded
<status>:
0 not active
ID NQ
1 active
TI
5.11 AT+CCWA Call waiting
N F LY
This command allows control of the Call Waiting supplementary service. Activation,
EN
deactivation and status query are supported. Parameter <n> is used to disable/enable the
presentation of an unsolicited result code +CCWA: <number>,<type>,<class> to the TE
when call waiting service is enabled.
5.11.1 Format

+CCWA=[<n>[,<mode>[,<class>]] +CME ERROR: <err>
] when <mode>=2 and command
successful
+CCWA: <status>,<class1>
[<CR><LF>+CCWA: <status>,<class2>
[...]]
+CCWA? +CCWA: <n>
CO
+CCWA=? +CCWA: (list of supported <n>s)
5.11.2 Field
<n> (sets/shows the result code presentation status to the TE):

0 disable
L218 AT DOCUMENT
1 enable
<mode> (when <mode> parameter is not given, network is not interrogated):
0 disable
1 enable
2 query status
1 voice (telephony)
AL
<status>:
0 not active
1 active
ID NQ
<number>: string type phone number of calling address in format specified by <type>
TI
5.12 AT+CHLD Call related supplementary services

N F LY
EN
Requests call-related supplementary services. Refers to a service that allows a call to be
temporarily disconnected from the ME but the connection to be retained by the network, and
to a service that allows multiparty conversation. Calls can be put on hold, recovered, released
and added to a conversation.
5.12.1 Format

+CHLD=[<n>] +CME ERROR: <err>
+CHLD=? [+CHLD: (list of supported <n>s)]
5.12.2 Field
CO
<n> (sets/shows the result code presentation status to the TE):

0 Releases all held calls, or sets User-Determined User Busy for a waiting call
1 Releases all active calls and accepts the other (waiting or held) call
1x Releases the specific active call X
2 Places all active calls on hold and accepts the other (held or waiting) call‘
2x Places all active calls, except call X, on hold
3 Adds a held call to the conversation
L218 AT DOCUMENT
4 Connects two calls and disconnects the subscriber from both calls
5 Activate the Completion of Calls to Busy Subscriber Request. (CCBS)
5.13 AT+CTFR Call deflection
This refers to a service that causes an incoming alerting call to be forwarded to a specified
number.
5.13.1 Format

+CTFR=<number>[,<type>[,<subaddr>[,<satype>]]] +CME ERROR: <err>
+CTFR=?
AL
5.13.2 Field
ID NQ
TI
N F LY
<satype>: type of subaddress octet in integer format (refer TS 24.008 [8] subclause 10.5.4.8);
EN
default 128
5.14 AT+CUSD Unstructured supplementary service data
Allows control of the Unstructured Supplementary Service Data (USSD). Both network- and
mobile-initiated operations are supported. This command is used to enable the unsolicited
result code +CUSD.
5.14.1 Format

+CUSD=[<n>[,<str>[,<dcs>]]] +CME ERROR: <err>
+CUSD? +CUSD: <n>
CO
+CUSD=? +CUSD: (list of supported <n>s)
5.14.2 Field
<n>:
0 disable the result code presentation to the TE

L218 AT DOCUMENT
1 enable the result code presentation to the TE

2 cancel session (not applicable to read command response)
<str>: string type USSD string
<dcs>: 3GPP TS 23.038 [25] Cell Broadcast Data Coding Scheme in integer format (default 15)
<m>:
0 no further user action required
1 further user action required
2 USSD terminated by network
3 other local client has responded
4 operation not supported
5 network time out
5.15 AT+CSSN Supplementary service notifications
AL
This command refers to supplementary service related network initiated notifications. The set
command enables/disables the presentation of notification result codes from TA to TE.
When <n>=1 and a supplementary service notification is received after a mobile originated call
ID NQ
setup, intermediate result code +CSSI: <code1>[,<index>] is sent to TE before any other MO call
TI
setup result codes presented in the present document or in V.250 [14]. When several different
<code1>s are received from the network, each of them shall have its own +CSSI result code.
When <m>=1 and a supplementary service notification is received during a mobile terminated
N F LY
call setup or during a call, or when a forward check supplementary service notification is received,
EN
unsolicited result code +CSSU:
<code2>[,<index>[,<number>,<type>[,<subaddr>,<satype>]]] is sent to TE. In
case of MT call setup, result code is sent after every +CLIP result code (refer command
"Calling line identification presentation +CLIP") and when several different <code2>s are
received from the network, each of them shall have its own +CSSU result code.
5.15.1 Format

+CSSN=[<n>[,<m>]]
+CSSN? +CSSN: <n>,<m>
+CSSN=? +CSSN: (list of supported <n>s),(list of supported <m>s)
CO
5.15.2 Field
<n> (parameter sets/shows the +CSSI result code presentation status to the TE):
0 disable
1 enable
<m> (parameter sets/shows the +CSSU result code presentation status to the TE):
0 disable
L218 AT DOCUMENT
1 enable
<code1> (it is manufacturer specific, which of these codes are supported):
0 unconditional call forwarding is active
1 some of the conditional call forwardings are active
2 call has been forwarded
3 call is waiting
4 this is a CUG call (also <index> present)
5 outgoing calls are barred
6 incoming calls are barred
7 CLIR suppression rejected
8 call has been deflected
<index>: refer "Closed user group +CCUG"
<code2> (it is manufacturer specific, which of these codes are supported):
0 this is a forwarded call (MT call setup)
AL
1 this is a CUG call (also <index> present) (MT call setup)
2 call has been put on hold (during a voice call)
3 call has been retrieved (during a voice call)
ID NQ
4 multiparty call entered (during a voice call)
TI
5 call on hold has been released (this is not a SS notification) (during a voice call)
6 forward check SS message received (can be received whenever)
7 call is being connected (alerting) with the remote party in alerting state
in explicit call transfer operation (during a voice call)
N F LY
8 call has been connected with the other remote party in explicit call transfer operation
EN
(also number
and subaddress parameters may be present) (during a voice call or MT call setup)
9 this is a deflected call (MT call setup)
10 sdditional incoming call forwarded
<satype>: type of subaddress octet in integer format (refer TS 24.008 [8] subclause 10.5.4.8)
5.16 AT+CLCC List current calls
Returns list of current calls of ME. If command succeeds but no calls are available, no
information response is sent to TE.
CO
5.16.1 Format

+CLCC [+CLCC: <id1>,<dir>,<stat>,<mode>,<mpty>[,
<number>,<type>]
[<CR><LF>+CLCC: <id2>,<dir>,<stat>,<mode>,<mpty>[,

L218 AT DOCUMENT
<number>,<type>]
[...]]]
+CME ERROR: <err>
+CLCC=?
5.16.2 Field
<idx>: integer type; call identification number as described in 3GPP TS 22.030 [19] subclause
4.5.5.1;
this number can be used in +CHLD command operations
<dir>:
0 mobile originated (MO) call
AL
1 mobile terminated (MT) call
<stat> (state of the call):
0 active
1 held
ID NQ
2 dialing (MO call)
TI
3 alerting (MO call)
4 incoming (MT call)
5 waiting (MT call)
<mode> (bearer/teleservice):
N F LY
EN
0 voice
1 data
2 fax
3 voice followed by data, voice mode
4 alternating voice/data, voice mode
5 alternating voice/fax, voice mode
6 voice followed by data, data mode
7 alternating voice/data, data mode
8 alternating voice/fax, fax mode
9 unknown
<mpty>:
0 call is not one of multiparty (conference) call parties
1 call is one of multiparty (conference) call parties
<number>: string type phone number in format specified by <type>
CO
5.17 AT+CPOL Preferred operator list
This command is used to edit the SIM preferred list of networks. Execute command writes an
entry in the SIM list of preferred operators (EFPLMNsel). If <index> is given but <oper> is left out,
entry is deleted. If <oper> is given but <index> is left out, <oper> is put in the next free

L218 AT DOCUMENT
location. If only <format> is given, the format of the <oper> in the read command is changed.
5.17.1 Format
+CPOL=[<index>][, +CME ERROR: <err>

<format>[,<oper>[<GSM_AcT>,<G
SM_compact_AcT>,<UTRAN_AcT>]]
]
+CPOL? +CPOL:
<index1>,<format>,<oper1>[,<GSM_AcT1
>,
AL
<GSM_Com
pact_AcT1>,<UTRAN_AcT1>]
[<CR><LF>+CPOL:
<index2>,<format>,<oper2>[,<GSM_AcT2
ID NQ
TI >,
<GSM_Com
pact_AcT2>,<UTRAN_AcT2>]
[...]]
+CME ERROR: <err>
N F LY
EN
+CPOL=? +CPOL: (list of supported <index>s),
(list of supported <format>s)
+CME ERROR: <err>
5.17.2 Field
<indexn>: integer type; the order number of operator in the SIM/USIM preferred operator list
<format>:
0 long format alphanumeric <oper>
1 short format alphanumeric <oper>
2 numeric <oper>
<opern>: string type; <format> indicates if the format is alphanumeric or numeric (see +COPS)
<GSM_AcTn>: GSM access technology:
CO
0 access technology not selected

1 access technology selected
<GSM_Compact_AcTn>: GSM access technology:
<UTRAN_AcTn>: GSM access technology:

L218 AT DOCUMENT
5.18 AT+CPLS Selection of preferred PLMN list
This command is used to select one PLMN selector with Access Technology list in the SIM card or active
application in the UICC (GSM or USIM), that is used by +CPOL command. Execute command selects a list in
the SIM/USIM. Read command returns the selected PLMN selector list from the SIM/USIM. Test command
returns the whole index range supported lists by the SIM/USIM
5.18.1 Format
Command Possible Response(s)

+CPLS=<list> +CME ERROR: <err>
AL
+CPLS? +CPLS: <list>
+CPLS=? +CPLS: <list of supported<lis>s>
+CME ERROR: <err>
ID NQ
5.18.2 Field
TI
N F LY
<list>: integer type

EN
0 User controlled PLMN selector with Access Technology EFPLMNwAcT, if not found in
the SIM/UICC then PLMN preferred list EFPLMNsel (this file is only available in SIM
card or GSM application selected in UICC)
1 Operator controlled PLMN selector with Access Technology EFOPLMNwAcT
2 HPLMN selector with Access Technology EFHPLMNwAcT
5.19 AT+COPN Read operator name
Execute command returns the list of operator names from the MT. Each operator code
<numericn> that has an alphanumeric equivalent <alphan> in the MT memory shall be
returned.
5.19.1 Format
CO

+COPN +COPN: <numeric1>,<alpha1>
[<CR><LF>+COPN: <numeric2>,<alpha2>
[...]]
+CME ERROR: <err>
+COPN=?

L218 AT DOCUMENT
5.19.2 Field
<numericn>: string type; operator in numeric format (see +COPS)

<alphan>: string type; operator in long alphanumeric format (see +COPS)
5.20 AT+CAEMLPP eMLPP priority Registration and Interrogation
The execute command is used to change the default priority level of the user in the network.
The requested priority level is checked against the eMLPP subscription of the user stored on the SIM
card or in the active application in the UICC (GSM or USIM) EFeMLPP. If the user doesn't have
subscription for the requested priority level an ERROR or +CMEE ERROR
result code is returned.
AL
The read command triggers an interrogation of the provision of the maximum priority level
which the service subscriber is allowed to use and default priority level activated by the user.
If the service is not provisioned, a result code including the SS-Status (?) parameter is returned.
ID NQ
5.20.1 Format TI
+CAEMLPP=<priority> +CME ERROR: <err>
N F LY
+CAEMLPP? +CAEMLPP:
EN
<default_priority>,<max_priority>
+CME ERROR: <err>
+CAEMLPP=?
5.20.2 Field
<priority>: integer type parameter which identifies the default priority level to be activated in the
network, values specified in 3GPP TS 22.067 [54]
<default_priority>: integer type parameter which identifies the default priority level which is
activated in the network, values specified in 3GPP TS 22.067 [54]
<max_priority>: integer type parameter which identifies the maximum priority level for which
the service subscriber has a subscription in the network, values specified in 3GPP TS 22.067
[54].
CO
5.21 AT+WS46 Select wireless network
Select the cellular network (Wireless Data Service; WDS) to operate with the TA. This
command may be used when TA is asked to indicate the networks in which it can operate.

L218 AT DOCUMENT
5.21.1 Format

+WS46=[<n>]
+WS46? <n>
+WS46=? (list of supported <n>s)
5.21.2 Field
<n>:
25 3GPP Systems (both GERAN and UTRAN)
AL
ID NQ
TI
N F LY
EN
CO

L218 AT DOCUMENT
6 MT control and status command
6.1 AT+CPAS Phone activity status
Returns the activity status <pas> of the ME. It can be used to interrogate the ME before
requesting action from the phone. If the command is executed without the <mode> parameter,
only <pas> values from 0 to 128 are returned. If the <mode> parameter is included in the
execution command, <pas> values from 129 to 255 may also be returned.
6.1.1 Format
AL
+CPAS +CPAS: <pas>
ID NQ
+CME ERROR: <err>
+CPAS=?
TI
+CPAS: (list of supported <pas>s)
+CME ERROR: <err>
N F LY
6.1.2 Field
EN
<pas>:
0 ready (MT allows commands from TA/TE)
1 unavailable (MT does not allow commands from TA/TE)
2 unknown (MT is not guaranteed to respond to instructions)
3 ringing (MT is ready for commands from TA/TE, but the ringer is active)
4 call in progress (MT is ready for commands from TA/TE, but a call is in progress)
5 asleep (MT is unable to process commands from TA/TE because it is in a low
functionality state)
6.2 AT+CFUN Set Phone Functionality
AT+CFUN = 0 turn off radio and SIM power. (supported only for feature phone with feature
CO
option)
AT+CFUN = 1, 1 or AT+CFUN=4,1 can reset the target. (supported only for feature phone)
AT+CFUN = 1 can enter normal mode. (supported only for module solution)
AT+CFUN = 4 can enter flight mode. (supported only for module solution)

L218 AT DOCUMENT
6.2.1 Format

+CFUN=[<fun>[,<rst>]] +CME ERROR: <err>
+CFUN=? +CFUN: (list of supported <fun>s), (list of supported <rst>s)
+CME ERROR: <err>
6.2.2 Field
<fun> : 1 full functionality

4 disable phone both transmit and receive RF circuits (supported only for module
solution)
AL
0 minimal functionality, turn off radio and SIM power.
<rst> : 0 do not reset the MT before setting it to <fun> power level
1 reset the MT before setting it to <fun> power level
ID NQ
6.2.3 Note
TI
N F LY
EN
N/A
6.2.3.2 Usage Note
The supported parameters are subject to change according to different compile directives
(options).
AT+CFUN=1,1 or AT+CFUN=4,1 can only reset the target, not fully compliable with 27.007
<fun> = 0,1,4 only supported in projects with __ATCFUN_FLIGHTMODE_SUPPORT__ option.
6.3 AT+CPIN Enter PIN
Set command sends to the ME a password which is necessary before it can be operated
(SIM PIN, SIM PUK, PH-SIM PIN, etc.). If the PIN is to be entered twice, the TA shall
CO
automatically repeat the PIN. If no PIN request is pending, no action is taken towards ME
and an error message, +CME ERROR, is returned to TE. Refer [1] 9.2 for possible <err>
values.
If the PIN required is SIM PUK or SIM PUK2, the second pin is required. This second pin,
<newpin>, is used to replace the old pin in the SIM.

L218 AT DOCUMENT
6.3.1 Format
+CPIN=<pin>[,<newpin>] +CME ERROR: <err>

+CPIN? +CPIN: <code>
+CME ERROR: <err>
+CPIN=?
6.3.2 Field
<pin>, <newpin>: string type values
AL
<code> values reserved by the present document:
READY MT is not pending for any password
SIM PIN MT is waiting SIM PIN to be given
ID NQ
SIM PUK MT is waiting SIM PUK to be given
TI
PH-SIM PIN MT is waiting phone to SIM card password to be given
PH-FSIM PIN MT is waiting phone-to-very first SIM card password to be given
PH-FSIM PUK MT is waiting phone-to-very first SIM card unblocking password to be given
SIM PIN2 MT is waiting SIM PIN2 to be given
N F LY
SIM PUK2 MT is waiting SIM PUK2 to be given

EN
PH-NET PIN MT is waiting network personalization password to be given
PH-NET PUK MT is waiting network personalization unblocking password to be given
PH-NETSUB PIN MT is waiting network subset personalization password to be given
PH-NETSUB PUK MT is waiting network subset personalization unblocking password to
be given
PH-SP PIN MT is waiting service provider personalization password to be given
PH-SP PUK MT is waiting service provider personalization unblocking password to be
given
PH-CORP PIN MT is waiting corporate personalization password to be given
PH-CORP PUK MT is waiting corporate personalization unblocking password to be
given
6.4 AT+CBC Battery Charge

CO
Execution and read command returns battery connection status <bcs> and battery level <bcl>
of the ME.
6.4.1 Format

L218 AT DOCUMENT
+CBC +CBC: <bcs>,<bcl>

+CME ERROR: <err>
+CBC=? +CBC: (list of supported <bcs>s),(list of supported
<bcl>s)
6.4.2 Field
<bcs>:
0 MT is powered by the battery
1 MT has a battery connected, but is not powered by it
2 MT does not have a battery connected
3 Recognized power fault, calls inhibited
AL
<bcl>:
0 battery is exhausted, or MT does not have a battery connected
1...100 battery has 1 100 percent of capacity remaining
ID NQ
6.5 AT+CSQ Signal Quality
TI
The command returns received signal strength indication <rssi> and channel bit error rate
<ber> from the ME.
N F LY
EN
6.5.1 Format

+CSQ +CSQ: <rssi>,<ber>
+CME ERROR: <err>
+CSQ=? +CSQ: (list of supported <rssi>s),(list of supported <ber>s)
6.5.2 Field
<rssi>:
0 113 dBm or less
1 111 dBm
CO
2...30 109... 53 dBm

31 51 dBm or greater
99 not known or not detectable
<ber> (in percent):
0...7 as RXQUAL values in the table in TS 45.008 [20] subclause 8.2.4
not known or not detectable

L218 AT DOCUMENT
6.6 AT+CMEC Mobile Termination control mode
Set command selects the equipment, which operates MT keypad, writes to MT display and sets
MT indicators. If operation mode is not allowed by the MT, +CME ERROR: <err> is returned.
Test command returns the modes supported as compound values.
6.6.1 Format

+CMEC=[<keyp>[,<disp>[ +CME ERROR: <err>
,<ind>]]]
+CMEC? +CMEC: <keyp>,<disp>,<ind>
AL
+CMEC=? +CMEC: (list of supported <keyp>s),(list of
supported <disp>s),(list of supported <ind>s)
ID NQ
6.6.2 Field TI
<keyp>:
0 MT can be operated only through its keypad (execute command of +CKPD cannot be used)
N F LY
1 MT can be operated only from TE (with command +CKPD)

EN
2 MT can be operated from both MT keypad and TE
<disp>:
0 only MT can write to its display (command +CDIS can only be used to read the display)
1 only TE can write to MT display (with command +CDIS)
2 MT display can be written by both MT and TE
<ind>:
0 only MT can set the status of its indicators (command +CIND can only be used to read the
indicators)
1 only TE can set the status of MT indicators (with command +CIND)
2 MT indicators can be set by both MT and TE
6.6.3 Note
CO
6.6.3.2 Usage Note
N/A

L218 AT DOCUMENT
6.7 AT+CIND Indicator control
Displays the value of ME indicators.
6.7.1 Format

+CIND=[<ind>[,<ind>[,...]] +CME ERROR: <err>
]
+CIND? +CIND: <ind>[,<ind>[,...]]
+CME ERROR: <err>
+CIND=? +CIND: (<descr>,(list of supported
AL
<ind>s)) [,(<descr>,(list of supported
<ind>s))[,...]]
+CME ERROR: <err>
ID NQ
6.7.2 Field
TI
<ind>: integer type value, which shall be in range of corresponding <descr>
N F LY
<descr> values reserved by the present document and their <ind> ranges:
EN
"battchg" battery charge level (0 5)
"signal" s ignal quality (0 5)
"service" service availability (0 1)
"message" message received (0 1)
"call" call in progress (0 1)
"roam" roaming indicator (0 1)
"call setup" call setup indicator(0 3)
"smsfull" a short message memory storage in the MT has become full(1) or
memory locations are available (0)
6.7.3 Note

CO
N/A
6.7.3.2 Usage Note
"call setup" is proprietary defined in MTK solution and only used when BT supported.

L218 AT DOCUMENT
6.8 URC: +CIEV NITZ indicator event
This URC is the result code of an NITZ indicator event.
6.8.1 Format
Unsolicited result code

+CIEV: <ind>,<value1>[,<value2>,…]
6.8.2 Field
AL
<ind>: integer type value
9: NITZ date/time/timezone information
+CIEV: 9,<UT>,<TZ>[,<DST>]
<UT> , Universal Time , String type
ID NQ
"YY/MM/DD,HH:MM:SS"
TI
<TZ>: Local Time Zone, Integer type
ex: +4 or -4
<DST>: Daylight Saving Time , Integer type
N F LY
1: Summer time
EN
0: Winter time
ex: +CIEV: 9,"09/05/16,16:56:00",-28,1
6.8.3 Note
Available after W09.24
6.9 AT+CMER Mobile Termination event reporting
Set command enables or disables sending of unsolicited result codes from TA to TE in the case
of key pressings, display changes, and indicator state changes.
Test command returns the modes supported as compound values.
CO
6.9.1 Format

+CMER=[<mode>[,<keyp> +CME ERROR: <err>
[,<disp>[,<ind>[,<bfr
>][,<tscrn>]]]]]
+CMER? +CMER:

L218 AT DOCUMENT
<mode>,<keyp>,<disp>,<ind>,<bfr>
+CMER=? +CMER: (list of supported <mode>s),(list of
supported <key>s),(list of supported
<disp>s), (list of supported <ind>s),(list of
supported <bfr>s), (list of supported
<tscrn>s)
6.9.2 Field
<mode>: integer type

0 buffer unsolicited result codes in the TA; if TA result code buffer is full, codes can be
buffered in some other place or the oldest ones can be discarded
AL
1 discard unsolicited result codes when TA-TE link is reserved (e.g. in on-line data
mode); otherwise forward them directly to the TE
2 buffer unsolicited result codes in the TA when TA-TE link is reserved (e.g. in on-line
data mode) and flush them to the TE after reservation; otherwise forward them
ID NQ
directly to the TE
TI
3 forward unsolicited result codes directly to the TE; TA-TE link specific inband
technique used to embed result coses and data when TA is in on-line data mode
<keyp>: integer type
0 no keypad event reporting
N F LY
EN
1 keypad event reporting using result code +CKEV: <key>, <press>, <key> indicates
the key (refer IRA values defined in table in subclause "Keypad control +CKPD") and
<press> if the key is pressed or released (1 for pressing and 0 for releasing). Only
those key pressing, which are not caused by +CKPD shall be indicated by the TA to
the TE.
NOTE 1: When this mode is enabled, corresponding result codes of all keys currently pressed
should be flushed to the TA regardless of <bfr> setting.
2 Keypad event reporting using result code +CKEV: <key>, <press>. All key pressings
shall be directed from TA to TE.
NOTE 2: When this mode is enabled, corresponding result codes of all keys currently pressed
should be flushed to the TA regardless of <bfr> setting.
<disp>: integer type
0 no display event reporting
<ind>: integer type
CO
0 no indicator event reporting

1 indicator event reporting using result code +CIEV: <ind>,<value>. <ind> indicates the
indicator order number (as specified for +CIND) and <value> is the new value of
indicator. Only those indicator events, which are not caused by +CIND shall be
indicated by the TA to TE
2 indicator event reporting using result code +CIEV: <ind>,<value>. All indicator events
shall be directed from TA to TE
<bfr>:
L218 AT DOCUMENT
0 TA buffer of unsolicited result codes defined within this command is cleared when
<mode> 1...3 is entered
1 TA buffer of unsolicited result codes defined within this command is flushed to the TE
when <mode> 1...3 is entered (OK response shall be given before flushing the codes)
<tscrn>:
0 no touch screen event reporting
1 touch screen event reporting using result code +CTEV: <action>,<x>,<y>. The
<x>,<y> parameters indicate the x, y coordinates on the touch screen device (as
specified for +CTSA), and <action> indicates the action performed on the screen (0
for screen released, 1 for screen depressed, 2 for single tap, and 3 for double tap).
Only those touch screen events, which are not caused by +CTSA shall be indicated
by the TA to the TE.
NOTE 3: When this mode is enabled, corresponding result codes of all touch screen
actions should be flushed to the TA regardless of <bfr> setting.
AL
2 touch screen event reporting using result code +CTEV: <action>, <x>, <y>. All touch
screen events shall be directed from the TA to the TE.
ID NQ
TI
3 Verbose mode. Touch screen event reporting using +CTEV: <action>,<x>,<y>. This is
a special mode where intermediate depressed result codes (+CTEV:
<x>,<y>,depressed) are generated for each new <x>,<y> coordinate detected while a
user is dragging a touch to a new location. All other touch screen actions shall be
N F LY
directed from the TA to the TE normally. Only those touch screen events which are not
EN
caused by +CTSA shall be indicated by the TA to the TE.
6.9.3 Note
We don‘t support set command of +CIND to set the values of MT indicators. So behaviors of
<ind> 1 and 2 are currently the same.
The +CKEV URC which set by <keyp> parameter only reports when UART setting is SIM1.
<tscrn> parameter take effect after W1021.
6.10 AT+CPBS Select Phonebook Memory Storage

CO
Selects the phonebook memory storage <storage> that is used by other phonebook
commands.
6.10.1 Format

+CPBS=<storage> +CME ERROR: <err>
L218 AT DOCUMENT
+CPBS? +CPBS: <storage>[,<used>,<total>]

+CME ERROR: <err>
+CPBS=? +CPBS: (list of supported <storage>s)
6.10.2 Field
"ME" MT phonebook
"SM" SIM/UICC phonebook
"LD" last-dialling phonebook
"MC" MT missed calls list
"RC" MT received calls list.
"DC" MT dialled calls list
AL
"FD" SIM/USIM fixdialling-phonebook
"ON" SIM own numbers (MSISDNs) list
6.10.3 Note
ID NQ
TI
1. Before 10A, We don‘t support query <used> field for the storage "LD", "MC", "RC", "DC".
It would be always 0.
2. After 10A(include 10A), We don‘t support query <used> field for the storage "LD", "MC",
N F LY
"RC", "DC" in the module(modem) project. It would be always 0.

EN
3.
6.11 AT+CPBR Read phonebook entries
Returns phone book entries in location number range <index1>...<index2> from the current
phonebook memory storage selected by AT+CPBS. If <index2> is omitted, only location
<index1> is returned. Entry fields returned are location number <indexn>, phone number
<number> in <indexn>, and text <text> associated with the number.
6.11.1 Format

+CPBR=<index1> [+CPBR:
CO
[,<index2>] <index1>,<number>,<type>,<text>[,<hidden>][[...]
<CR><LF>+CPBR:
<index2>,<number>,<type>,<text>[,<hidden>]]]
+CME ERROR: <err>
+CPBR=? +CPBR: (list of supported
<index>s),[<nlength>],[<tlength>]
+CME ERROR: <err>

L218 AT DOCUMENT
6.11.2 Field
<index1>, <index2>, <index>: integer type values in the range of location numbers of
phonebook memory
<number>: string type phone number of format <type>
<text>: string type field of maximum length <tlength>; character set as specified by
command Select TE Character Set +CSCS
<nlength>: integer type value indicating the maximum length of field <number>
<tlength>: integer type value indicating the maximum length of field <text>
<hidden>: indicates if the entry is hidden or not
AL
0: phonebook entry not hidden
1: phonebook entry hidden
ID NQ
6.12 AT+CPBF Find Phonebook entries
TI
Execution command returns phonebook entries (from the current phonebook memory storage
selected with +CPBS) which alphanumeric field start with string <findtext>(Prefix match).
N F LY
Entry fields returned are location number <indexn>, phone number stored there <number> (of
EN
format <type>) and text <text> associated with the number.
6.12.1 Format

+CPBF=<findtext> [+CPBF: <index1>,<number>,<type>,<text> [[...]
<CR><LF>+CBPF: <index2>,<number>,<type>,<text>]]
+CME ERROR: <err>
+CPBF=? +CPBF: [<nlength>],[<tlength>]
+CME ERROR: <err>
6.12.2 Field
CO
<index1>, <index2>: integer type values in the range of location numbers of phonebook
memory
<findtext>, <text>: string type field of maximum length <tlength>. Only support "IRA"

L218 AT DOCUMENT
<tlength>: integer type value indicating the maximum length of field <text>
6.13 AT+CPBW Write Phonebook entries
Writes phonebook entry in location number <index> in the current phonebook memory
storage area, selected with AT+CPBS. If the <number> and <text> parameters are omitted,
the entry is deleted. If <index> is omitted but <number> is included, the entry is written to the
first free location in the phonebook.
6.13.1 Format

+CPBW=[<index>][,<number> +CME ERROR: <err>
AL
[,<type>[,<text>]]]
+CPBW=? +CPBW: (list of supported
<index>s),[<nlength>],
ID NQ
TI (list of supported <type>s),[<tlength>]
+CME ERROR: <err>
6.13.2 Field
N F LY
EN
<index>: integer type values in the range of location numbers of phonebook memory
<text>: string type field of maximum length <tlength>; character set as specified by command Select
TE Character Set +CSCS. "UCS2"", and "IRA"" are supported.
<tlength>: integer type value indicating the maximum bytes of field <text> after encoding
6.14 AT+CCLK Clock
Set command sets the real-time clock of the MT.

Read command returns the current setting of the clock.
CO
6.14.1 Format
+CCLK=<time> +CME ERROR: <err>

L218 AT DOCUMENT
+CCLK? +CCLK: <time>

+CME ERROR: <err>
+CCLK=?
6.14.2 Field
<time>: string type value; format is "yy/MM/dd,hh:mm:ss",

where characters indicate year (two last digits), month, day, hour, minutes, seconds.
6.15 AT+CALA Alarm
Sets an alarm time in the ME.
AL
6.15.1 Format
ID NQ
Command TI Possible response(s)
+CALA=<time>[,<n>[ +CME ERROR: <err>
,<type>[,<text>[,<
recur>]]]]
N F LY
+CALA? [+CALA: <time>,<n1>,,,<recurr>

EN
[<CR><LF>+CALA: <time>,<n2>,,,<recurr>
[...]]]
+CME ERROR: <err>
+CALA=? OK
6.15.2 Field
<time>: refer +CCLK

<n>: integer type value indicating the index of the alarm.
<type>: integer type. But we don‘t care about type value.
<text>: string type. But we don‘t care about text content. MMI doesn‘t support.
<recurr>: string type value indicating day of weeks for the alarm in one of the following format:
"<1..7>[,<1..7>[…]]" – Sets a recurrent alarm for one or more days in the week. The
CO
digits 1 to 7 corresponds to the days in the week, Monday (1), …, Sunday (7).
Example: The string "1,2,3,4,5" may be used to set an alarm for all weekdays.
"0" – Sets a recurrent alarm for all days in the week.
6.16 AT+CSIM Generic SIM Access
Set command transmits to the MT the <command> it then shall send as it is to the SIM. In the
L218 AT DOCUMENT
same manner the SIM <response> shall be sent back by the MT to the TA as it is. Refer
subclause 9.2 for <err> values.
This command allows a direct control of the SIM by an distant application on the TE. The TE
shall then take care of processing SIM information within the frame specified by SM/UMTS.
6.16.1 Format

+CSIM=<length>,<command> +CSIM: <length>,<response>
+CME ERROR: <err>
+CSIM=?
AL
6.16.2 Field
<length> : integer type; length of the characters that are sent to TE in <command> or <response>
ID NQ
(two times the actual length of the command or response)
TI
<command> : command passed on by the MT to the SIM in the format as described in 3GPP TS
51.011 [28] (hexadecimal character format; refer +CSCS)
<response> : response to the command passed on by the SIM to the MT in the format as described
in 3GPP TS 51.011 [28] (hexadecimal character format; refer +CSCS)
N F LY
EN
6.16.3 Note
1. The command only support when __CSIM__ is defined

2. We support AT+CSIM with limitation:
We only support SELECT, STATUS, READ BINARY, UPDATE BINARY, READ RECORD,
UPDATE RECORD, GET RESPONSE commands.
We don‘t allow the AT users to select another application, send termination indication or
initialization indication. If the user send SELECT by AID, STATUS by initialization or
termination, he will get ERROR in return.
3. We support AT+CSIM with GSM CLA, and UICC CLA, but we don‘t support logical channels
other than the default channel.
6.16.4 Example
CO
1. SELECT
(1) (P1 = SELECT MF by file id)
AT+CSIM=14,"00A4000C023F00"
+CSIM: 4, "9000"
OK
2. SELECT
(1) (P1 = SELECT by DF name)
L218 AT DOCUMENT
AT+CSIM=42,"00A4040C10A0000000871002FF47700189000001FF"
ERROR
3. READ BINARY
(1) (Pre-condition: SELECT EF_IMSI (P1 = SELECT by path from MF, P2 = return with FCP))
AT+CSIM=20,"00A40804047FFF6F0700"
+CSIM: 64, "621C8202412183026F07A5038001718A01058B036F0605800200098801389000"
OK
(2) READ BINARY
AT+CSIM=10,"00B0000009"
+CSIM: 22, "0849667914305241049000"
OK
4. UPDATE BINARY
(1) (Pre-condition: SELECT EF_PLMNwAcT(P1 = SELECT by path from MF, P2 = return with
FCP))
AL
AT+CSIM=20,"00A40804047FFF6F6000"
+CSIM: 64, "621C8202412183026F60A5038001718A01058B036F0606800200878801509000"
OK
ID NQ
(2) READ BINARY
+CSIM: 18,
TI
AT+CSIM=10,"00B0000087"
"888888008854F400808025F510808005F221808015F001808005F520808015F52080
8004F401808004F454808004F429808004F430808004F494808004F404808054F050808025F0
N F LY
1080
EN
8054F5108080FFFFFF0000FFFFFF0000FFFFFF0000FFFFFF0000FFFFFF0000FFFFFF0000F
FFFFF00
00FFFFFF0000FFFFFF0000FFFFFF0000FFFFFF00009000"
OK
(3) UPDATE BINARY
AT+CSIM=20,"00D600000521F3548080"
+CSIM: 4, "9000"
OK
6.17 AT+CRSM Restricted SIM access
Set command transmits to the MT the SIM <command> and its required parameters.
CO
6.17.1 Format

+CRSM=<command>[,<fileid> +CRSM: <sw1>,<sw2>[,<response>]
[,<P1>,<P2>,<P3> +CME ERROR: <err>
[,<data>[,<pathid>]]]]
+CRSM=?

L218 AT DOCUMENT
6.17.2 Field
<command> (command passed on by the MT to the SIM; refer 3GPP TS11.11):

176 READ BINARY
178 READ RECORD
192 GET RESPONSE
214 UPDATE BINARY
220 UPDATE RECORD
242 STATUS
<fileid>: integer type; this is the identifier of a elementary data file on SIM.
<P1>, <P2>, <P3>: integer type; parameters passed on by the MT to the SIM.
AL
(For detailed information , please refer 3GPP TS11.11 Section 9.2)
<data>: information which shall be written to the SIM (hexadecimal character format; refer
+CSCS)
<pathid>: string type; contains the path of an elementary file on the SIM/UICC in hexadecimal
ID NQ
format as TI
defined in ETSI TS 102 221 [60] (e.g. "7F205F70" in SIM and UICC case). The <pathid> shall
only be used
in the mode "select by path from MF" as defined in ETSI TS 102 221 [60].
NOTE: Since valid elementary file identifiers may not be unique over all valid
N F LY
dedicated file identifiers the <pathid> indicates the targeted UICC/SIM directory path
EN
in case of ambiguous file identifiers. For earlier versions of this specification or if
<pathid> is omitted, it could be implementation specific which one will be selected.
<sw1>, <sw2>: integer type; information from the SIM about the execution of the actual
command.
<response>: response of a successful completion of the command previously issued
(hexadecimal character format)
[Note1]: READ BINARY command is used for transparent EF. READ RECORD is used for linear fixed or cyclic
EF
[Note2]:Before using READ BINARY, READ RECORD, UPDATE BINARY, UPDATE RECORD, please use command
GET RESPONSE to get the exact length information first.
6.17.3 Note
CO
<pathid> + <fileid> can be a unique identifier on the SIM/UICC.

In USIM, the response of STATUS and GET RESPONSE is TLV format, and length is not fixed.
So the P3 should be assigned as "00" as 256 bytes, which is the maximum value of response
data.

L218 AT DOCUMENT
6.17.4 Example
1. Read EFSST (file_idx= 0x6F38 , structure: transparent)

(1) Get RESPONSE first , 3~4 byte is the file size information.(e.g. 000A=10 )
at+crsm=192,28472
+CRSM: 144, 0, "0000000A6F38040015005501010000"
OK
at+crsm=176,28472,0,0,10
+CRSM: 144, 0, "FF3FFFFF00003C03000C"
OK
2. Read a EFADN (file_idx= 0x6F3A , structure: Linear fixed)
(1)GET RESPONSE first , No.15 byte represents the record length (e.g 1E =30)
at+crsm=192,28474
AL
+CRSM: 144, 0, "00001D4C6F3A04001100220502011E"
OK
(2) READ RECORD
at+crsm=178,28474,1,4,30
ID NQ
+CRSM: 144, 0, TI
"6F776E6572FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF06819078303326FFFFFFFFFFFFFF"
OK
3. READ EFImageInstaceDataFiles (with <pathid>) (fIle_idx = 0x4F20(File id would be different if you
N F LY
use other SIM cards), structure: Transparent)

EN
(1) GET RESPONSE first (without AT command example)
(2) READ BINARY
AT+CRSM=176,20256,0,0,1,,"7F105F50"
+CRSM: 144, 0, "00"
OK
6.18 AT+CRSL Ringer Sound Level
Set the incoming call ringer sound level.
6.18.1 Format

CO
+CRSL=<level> +CME ERROR: <err>

+CRSL? +CRSL: <level>
+CME ERROR: <err>
+CRSL=? +CRSL: (list of supported <level>s)
+CME ERROR: <err>

L218 AT DOCUMENT
6.18.2 Field
<level>: integer type value with manufacturer specific range
6.18.3 Note
6.18.3.2 Usage Note
This command can’t be used when UART setting is SIM2
AL
6.19 AT+CLVL Loudspeaker volume level
Sets the volume of the internal speaker in the ME

ID NQ
6.19.1 Format
TI
N F LY
+CLVL=<level> +CME ERROR: <err>

EN
+CLVL? +CLVL: <level>
+CME ERROR: <err>
+CLVL=? +CLVL: (list of supported <level>s)
+CME ERROR: <err>
6.19.2 Field
<level>: integer type value with manufacturer specific range.
6.19.3 Usage Note
This command can‘t be used when UART setting is SIM2

CO
6.20 AT+CMUT Mute Control
Enable/Disable the uplink voice muting during a voice call.

L218 AT DOCUMENT
6.20.1 Format

+CMUT=<n> +CME ERROR: <err>
+CMUT? +CMUT: <n>
+CME ERROR: <err>
+CMUT=? +CMUT: (list of supported <n>s)
6.20.2 Field
<n>:
0 mute off
AL
1 mute on
6.20.3 Usage Note

ID NQ
TI
This command can‘t be used when UART setting is SIM2
6.21 AT+CCWE Call Meter maximum event

N F LY
EN
Shortly before the ACM (Accumulated Call Meter) maximum value is reached, an unsolicited
result code +CCWV will be sent, if enabled by this command. The warning is issued approximately
when 30 seconds call time remains. It is also issued when starting a call if less than 30 s call time
remains.
6.21.1 Format

+CCWE=<mode> +CME ERROR: <err>
+CCWE? +CCWE: <mode>
+CME ERROR: <err>
+CCWE=? +CCWE: (list of supported <mode>s)
+CME ERROR: <err>
CO
6.21.2 Field
<mode>:
0 Disable the call meter warning event
1 Enable the call meter warning event

L218 AT DOCUMENT
6.22 AT+CLAE Language Event
to enable/disable unsolicited result code +CLAV: <code>. If <mode>=1, +CLAV: <code > is
sent from the ME when the language in the ME is changed.
6.22.1 Format

+CLAE=<mode> +CME ERROR: <err>
+CLAE? +CLAE: <mode>
+CME ERROR: <err>
AL
+CLAE=? +CLAE: (list of supported <mode>s)
+CME ERROR: <err>
ID NQ
6.22.2 Field
<mode>:
TI
N F LY
0 Disable unsolicited result code +CLAE

EN
1 Enable unsolicited result code +CLAE
<code>: For description see +CLAN.
6.23 AT+CALD Delete alarm
Action command deletes an alarm in the MT.
6.23.1 Format

+CALD=<n> +CME ERROR: <err>
+CALD=? +CALD: (list of supported <n>s)
+CME ERROR: <err>
CO
6.23.2 Field
<n>: integer type value indicating the index of the alarm; default is manufacturer specific.

L218 AT DOCUMENT
6.24 AT+CTZR Time Zone Reporting
enables and disables the time zone change event reporting. If the reporting is enabled the MT
returns the unsolicited result code +CTZV: <tz> whenever the time zone is changed.
6.24.1 Format

+CTZR=<onoff> +CME ERROR: <err>
+CTZR? +CTZR: <onoff>
+CME ERROR: <err>
+CTZR=? +CTZR: (list of supported <onoff>s)
AL
+CME ERROR: <err>
6.24.2 Field
ID NQ
TI
<onoff>: integer type value indicating:
0 – Disable automatic time zone update via NITZ (default).
1 – Enable automatic time zone update via NITZ.
N F LY
EN
CO

L218 AT DOCUMENT
7 GPRS commands(27.007)
7.1 AT+CGDCONT Define PDP Context
Specifies PDP context parameter values for a PDP context identified by the (local) context
identification parameter, <cid>.
7.1.1 Format
AL
+CGDCONT=[<cid> [,<PDP_type> OK
[,<APN> [,<PDP_addr> [,<d_comp> ERROR
[,<h_comp> [,<pd1>
ID NQ
[,…[,pdN]]]]]]]]]
+CGDCONT?
TI +CGDCONT: <cid>, <PDP_type>, <APN>,
<PDP_addr>, <d_comp>,
<h_comp>[,<pd1>[,…[,pdN]]]
[<CR><LF>+CGDCONT: <cid>, <PDP_type>,
N F LY
<APN>,<PDP_addr>, <d_comp>,
EN
<h_comp>[,<pd1>[,…[,pdN]]]
[...]]
+CGDCONT=? +CGDCONT: (range of supported
<cid>s), <PDP_type>,,,(list of
supported <d_comp>s),
(list of supported <h_comp>s)[,(list
of supported <pd1>s)[,…[,(list of
supported <pdN>s)]]]
[<CR><LF>+CGDCONT: (range of
supported <cid>s), <PDP_type>,,,(list
of supported <d_comp>s),
(list of supported <h_comp>s)[,(list
of supported <pd1>s)[,…[,(list of
supported <pdN>s)]]]
CO
[...]]
7.1.2 Field
<cid>:
(PDP Context Identifier) a numeric parameter which specifies a particular PDP context
L218 AT DOCUMENT
definition. The parameter is local to the TE-MT interface and is used in other PDP context-
related commands. The range of permitted values (minimum value = 1) is returned by the
test form of the command.
<PDP_type>: (Packet Data Protocol type) a string parameter.
IP Internet Protocol (IETF STD 5)
<APN>: (Access Point Name) a string parameter which is a logical name that is used to
select the GGSN or the external packet data network.
If the value is null or omitted, then the subscription value will be requested.
<PDP_address>: a string parameter that identifies the MT in the address space applicable to
the PDP.
If the value is null or omitted, then a value may be provided by the TE during the PDP startup
procedure or, failing that, a dynamic address will be requested.
The read form of the command will continue to return the null string even if an address has
been allocated during the PDP startup procedure. The allocated address may be read using
AL
the +CGPADDR command.
<d_comp>: a numeric parameter that controls PDP data compression (applicable for SNDCP
only)
ID NQ
0 - off (default if value is omitted)
TI
<h_comp>: a numeric parameter that controls PDP header compression
<pd1>, … <pdN>: zero to N string parameters whose meanings are specific to the
<PDP_type>
N F LY
EN
7.2 AT+CGDSCONT Define Secondary PDP Context
The set command specifies PDP context parameter values for a Secondary PDP context
identified by the (local) context identification parameter, <cid>. The number of PDP contexts
that may be in a defined state at the same time is given by the range returned by the test
command.
7.2.1 Format

+CGDSCONT=[<cid> ,<p_cid OK
> [,<d_comp> ERROR
[,<h_comp>]]]
CO
+CGDSCONT? +CGDSCONT: <cid>, <p_cid>, <d_comp>,

<h_comp>
[<CR><LF>+CGDSCONT: <cid>, <p_cid>,
<d_comp>, <h_comp>
[...]]
+CGDSCONT=? +CGDSCONT: (range of supported
<cid>s), (list of <cid>s for active

L218 AT DOCUMENT
primary contexts),(list of supported

<d_comp>s),
(list of supported <h_comp>s)
7.2.2 Field
<cid>: (PDP Context Identifier) a numeric parameter which specifies a particular PDP context
definition. The parameter is local to the TE-MT interface and is used in other PDP contextrelated
commands. The range of permitted values (minimum value = 1) is returned by the
test form of the command.
<p_cid>: (Primary PDP Context Identifier) a numeric parameter which specifies a particular
PDP context definition which has been specified by use of the +CGDCONT command. The
AL
parameter is local to the TE-MT interface. The list of permitted values is returned by the test
form of the command.
<PDP_type>: (Packet Data Protocol type) a string parameter which specifies the type of packet
data protocol
ID NQ
IP Internet Protocol (IETF STD 5)
TI
<d_comp>: a numeric parameter that controls PDP data compression
<h_comp>: a numeric parameter that controls PDP header compression
N F LY
EN
7.3 AT+CGQREQ Quality of Service Profile (Requested)
This command allows the TE to specify a Quality of Service Profile that is used when the MT
sends an Activate PDP Context Request message to the network.
7.3.1 Format

+CGQREQ=[<cid> [,<precedence > OK
[,<delay> [,<reliability.> ERROR
[,<peak> [,<mean>]]]]]]
+CGQREQ? +CGQREQ: <cid>, <precedence >,
CO
<delay>, <reliability>, <peak>, <mean>

[<CR><LF>+CGQREQ: <cid>, <precedence
>, <delay>, <reliability.>, <peak>,
<mean>
[…]]
+CGQREQ=? +CGQREQ: <PDP_type>, (list of
supported <precedence>s), (list of
supported <delay>s), (list of
L218 AT DOCUMENT
supported <reliability>s) , (list of

supported <peak>s), (list of supported
<mean>s)
[<CR><LF>+CGQREQ: <PDP_type>, (list of
supported <peak>s), (list of supported
<mean>s)
[…]]
7.3.2 Field
AL
<cid>: a numeric parameter which specifies a particular PDP context definition
<precedence>: a numeric parameter which specifies the precedence class
<delay>: a numeric parameter which specifies the delay class
ID NQ
<reliability>: a numeric parameter which specifies the reliability class
TI
<peak>: a numeric parameter which specifies the peak throughput class
<mean>: a numeric parameter which specifies the mean throughput class
N F LY
7.4 AT+CGQMIN Quality of Service Profile (Minimum

EN
acceptable)
This command allows the TE to specify a minimum acceptable profile which is checked by the
MT against the negotiated profile returned in the Activate PDP Context Accept message.
7.4.1 Format

+CGQMIN=[<cid> [,<precedence > OK
[,<delay> [,<reliability.> ERROR
[,<peak> [,<mean>]]]]]]
+CGQMIN? +CGQMIN: <cid>, <precedence >,
CO
<delay>, <reliability>, <peak>,

<mean>
[<CR><LF>+CGQMIN: <cid>, <precedence
>, <delay>, <reliability.>, <peak>,
<mean>
[…]]
+CGQMIN=? +CGQMIN: <PDP_type>, (list of
L218 AT DOCUMENT

supported <peak>s), (list of
supported <mean>s)
[<CR><LF>+CGQMIN: <PDP_type>, (list
of supported <precedence>s), (list
of supported <delay>s), (list of
supported <peak>s), (list of
supported <mean>s)
[…]]
AL
7.4.2 Field

<precedence>: a numeric parameter which specifies the precedence class
ID NQ
<delay>: a numeric parameter which specifies the delay class
TI
<reliability>: a numeric parameter which specifies the reliability class
<peak>: a numeric parameter which specifies the peak throughput class
<mean>: a numeric parameter which specifies the mean throughput class
N F LY
EN
7.5 AT+CGATT PS attach or detach
The execution command is used to attach the MT to, or detach the MT from, the Packet
Domain service. After the command has completed, the MT remains in V.250 command state.
7.5.1 Format

+CGATT= [<state>] OK
ERROR
+CGATT? +CGATT: <state>
+CGATT=? +CGATT: (list of supported <state>s)
CO
7.5.2 Field
<state>: indicates the state of PS attachment

0 - detached
1 - attached

L218 AT DOCUMENT
7.6 AT +CGACT PDP context activate or deactivate
To activate or deactivate the specified PDP context (s).
7.6.1 Format

+CGACT=[<state> [,<cid>]] OK
ERROR
+CGACT? +CGACT: <cid>, <state>
[<CR><LF>+CGACT: <cid>, <state>
[...]]
AL
+CGACT=? +CGACT: (list of supported <state>s)
7.6.2 Field
ID NQ
TI
<state>: indicates the state of PDP context activation
0 - deactivated
1 - activated
N F LY
Other values are reserved and will result in an ERROR response to the execution command.
EN
<cid>: a numeric parameter which specifies a particular PDP context definition. If no <cid> is
specified, then UE assumes it as 1. The usage of omitted <cid> to activate/deactivate all is not
supported.
7.7 AT +CGCMOD PDP Context Modify
The execution command is used to modify the specified PDP context (s) with respect to QoS
profiles and TFTs.
7.7.1 Format

+CGCMOD=<cid> OK
CO
ERROR
+CGCMOD=? +CGCMOD: (list of <cid>s
associated with active contexts)

L218 AT DOCUMENT
7.7.2 Field
<cid>: a numeric parameter which specifies a particular PDP context definition (see the +CGDCONT
and +CGDSCONT commands).
7.8 AT+CGDATA Enter data state
The execution command causes the MT to perform whatever actions are necessary to
establish communication between the TE and the network using one or more Packet Domain
PDP types.
7.8.1 Format
AL
+CGDATA=[<L2P> ,[<cid>]] CONNECT
ERROR
ID NQ
+CGDATA=? +CGDATA: (list of supported <L2P>s)
TI
7.8.2 Field
N F LY
EN
<L2P>: a string parameter that indicates the layer 2 protocol to be used between the TE and MT
PPP Point-to-point protocol for a PDP such as IP
Other values will result in an ERROR response.
<cid>: a numeric parameter which specifies a particular PDP context definition (see the +CGDCONT and
+CGDSCONT commands).
7.9 AT+CGPADDR Show PDP address
The execution command returns a list of PDP addresses for the specified context identifiers.
The test command returns a list of defined <cid>s.
7.9.1 Format
CO

+CGPADDR=<cid> +CGPADDR: <cid>,<PDP_addr>
+CGPADDR=? +CGPADDR: (list of defined <cid>s)

L218 AT DOCUMENT
7.9.2 Field
<cid>: a numeric parameter which specifies a particular PDP context definition (see the +CGDCONT and
+CGDSCONT commands). If no <cid> is specified, an ERROR result code will be returned. Multiple <cid>
field is not supported.
<PDP_address>: a string that identifies the MT in the address space applicable to the PDP. The address
may be static or dynamic. For a static address, it will be the one set by the +CGDCONT and
+CGDSCONT commands when the context was defined. For a dynamic address it will be the one
assigned during the last PDP context activation that used the context definition referred to by <cid>.
<PDP_address> is omitted if none is available.
7.10 AT+CGAUTO Automatic response to network request PDP
AL
context activation
ID NQ
The set command disables or enables an automatic positive response (auto-answer) to the
TI
receipt of a Request PDP Context Activation message from the network.
When the +CGAUTO=0 command is received, the MT shall not perform a PS detach if it is
attached. Subsequently, when the MT announces a network request for PDP context
activation by issuing the unsolicited result code RING or +CRING, the TE may manually
N F LY
accept or reject the request by issuing the +CGANS command or may simply ignore the
EN
network request.
When the +CGAUTO=1 command is received, the MT shall attempt to perform a PS attach if it
is not already attached. Failure will result in ERROR or, if enabled, +CME ERROR being returned to
the TE. Subsequently, when the MT announces a network request for PDP context activation by
issuing the unsolicited result code RING or +CRING to the TE, this is followed by the intermediate
result code CONNECT. The MT then enters V.250 online data state and follows the same procedure
as it would after having received a +CGANS=1 with no <L2P> or <cid> values specified.
7.10.1 Format

+CGAUTO=<n> OK
ERROR
CO
+CGAUTO? +CGAUTO: <n>
7.10.2 Field
<n>:

L218 AT DOCUMENT
0 turn off automatic response for Packet Domain only

1 turn on automatic response for Packet Domain only
For <n> = 0 Packet Domain network requests are manually accepted or rejected by the
+CGANS command.
For <n> = 1 Packet Domain network requests are automatically accepted according to the
description above.
7.11 AT+CGANS Manual response to a network request for PDP
context activation
The execution command requests the MT to respond to a network request for Packet Domain
PDP context activation which has been signaled to the TE by the RING or +CRING:
AL
unsolicited result code. The <response> parameter allows the TE to accept or reject the
request.
7.11.1 Format
ID NQ
Command
TI
+CGANS=[<response>,
Possible response(s)
OK
[<L2P> ,[<cid>]]] ERROR
N F LY
+CGANS=? +CGANS: (list of supported

EN
<response>s), (list of
supported <L2P>s)
7.11.2 Field
<response>: is a numeric parameter which specifies how the request should be responded to.
0 reject the request
1 accept and request that the PDP context be activated
<L2P>: a string parameter which indicates the layer 2 protocol to be used (see +CGDATA
command).
CO
7.12 AT+CGCLASS GPRS mobile station class
The set command is used to set the MT to operate according to the specified GPRS mobile
class. If the requested class is not supported, an ERROR or +CME ERROR response is returned.
Extended error responses are enabled by the +CMEE command.
The read command returns the current GPRS mobile class.
The test command is used for requesting information on the supported GPRS mobile classes.

L218 AT DOCUMENT
7.12.1 Format

+CGCLASS=[<class>] OK
ERROR
+CGCLASS? +CGCLASS:<class>
+CGCLASS=? +CGCLASS: (list of supported <class>s)
7.12.2 Field
<class>: a string parameter which indicates the GPRS mobile class (in descending order of
functionality)
AL
A class A (highest)
B classB
CG class C in GPRS only mode
ID NQ
CC class C in circuit switched only mode (lowest)
TI
Other values are reserved and will result in an ERROR response to the set command.
If the MT is GPRS attached when the set command is issued with a <class> = CC specified,
a detach request shall be sent to the network.
N F LY
7.12.3 Support Note

EN
On MAUI and 09A branches, after W0918, the test command and the query command can be
used while a normal SIM card is inserted. Before this, the +CGCLASS command can be only used
while a test SIM is inserted.
7.13 AT+CGREG GPRS network registration status
The set command controls the presentation of an unsolicited result code +CGREG: <stat>
when <n>=1 and there is a change in the MT's GPRS network registration status, or code
+CGREG: <stat>[,<lac>,<ci>[,<Act>]] when <n>=2 and there is a change of the network cell.
The read command returns the status of result code presentation and an integer <stat>
which shows whether the network has currently indicated the registration of the MT. Location
information elements <lac>,<ci> and <Act> are returned only when <n>=2 and MT is
CO
registered in the network.
7.13.1 Format

+CGREG=[<n>]
+CGREG? +CGREG:
L218 AT DOCUMENT
<n>,<stat>[,<lac>,<ci>[,<Act>]]
+CME ERROR: <err>\
7.13.2 Field
<n>:
0 disable network registration unsolicited result code
1 enable network registration unsolicited result code +CGREG: <stat>
2 enable network registration and location information unsolicited result code +CGREG:
<stat>:
0 not registered, MT is not currently searching an operator to register to
1 registered, home network
AL
2 not registered, but MT is currently trying to attach or searching an operator to register to
3 registration denied
4 unknown
5 registered, roaming
ID NQ
<lac>: string type; two byte location area code in hexadecimal format (e.g. "00C3" equals 195
TI
in decimal)
<ci>: string type; four byte cell ID in hexadecimal format
<Act>:
0 GSM
N F LY
2 UTRAN
EN
3 GSM w/EGPRS
4 UTRAN w/HSDPA
5 UTRAN w/HSUPA
7.14 AT+CGSMS Select service for MO SMS messages
The set command is used to specify the service or service preference that the MT will use to
send MO SMS messages.
The read command returns the currently selected service or service preference.
The test command is used for requesting information on the currently available services and
service preferences.
CO
7.14.1 Format

+CGSMS= <service> OK
ERROR
+CGSMS? +CGSMS: <service>

L218 AT DOCUMENT
7.14.2 Field
<service>: a numeric parameter which indicates the service or service preference to be used
0 Packet Domain
1 circuit switched
2 Packet Domain preferred (use circuit switched if GPRS not available)
3 circuit switched preferred (use Packet Domain if circuit switched not available)
7.15 AT+EGTP GPRS Transfer Preference (Proprietary
Command)
AL
This command is to set or to get GPRS transfer preference. It is only available when
__MONITOR_PAGE_DURING_TRASFER__ is defined
7.15.1 Format
ID NQ
Command
+EGTP=<state>
TI Possible Response(s)
OK
ERROR
N F LY
+EGTP? +EGTP: <state>

EN
<CR><LF>OK
+EGTP=? +EGTP: (list of supported <state>s)
7.15.2 Field
<state>: indicates the state of GPRS transfer preference

0 – DATA PREFER
1 – CALL PREFER
7.15.3 Support Note

CO
This command goes along with the feature option: MONITOR_PAGE_DURING_TRANSFER.

For feature phone projects, this command is only used for test purposes. The synchronization and
simultaneous access from AT and MMI interfaces are not supported. It is only supported in full AT
command set.

L218 AT DOCUMENT
7.16 AT+CGEQREQ 3G Quality of Service Profile (Requested)
This command allows the TE to specify a UMTS QoS Profile that is used when the MT sends
and Activate PDP Context Request message to the network.
7.16.1 Format

+CGEQREQ=[<cid> OK
[,<Traffic class> ERROR
[,<Maximum bitrate UL>
[,<Maximum bitrate DL>
AL
[,<Guaranteed bitrate UL>
[,<Guaranteed bitrate DL>
[,<Delivery order>
[,<Maximum SDU size>
ID NQ
[,<SDU error ratio>
TI
[,<Residual bit error
ratio> [,<Delivery of
erroneous SDUs>
[,<Transfer delay>
N F LY
[,<Traffic handling
EN
priority> ]]]]]]]]]]]]]
+CGEQREQ? +CGEQREQ: <cid>, <Traffic class>

,<Maximum bitrate UL> ,<Maximum
bitrate
DL> ,<Guaranteed bitrate UL>
,<Guaranteed bitrate DL> ,<Delivery
order> ,<Maximum SDU size> ,<SDU error
ratio> ,<Residual bit error ratio>
,<Delivery of erroneous SDUs>
,<Transfer delay> ,<Traffic handling
priority>
[<CR><LF>+CGEQREQ: <cid>, <Traffic
class> ,<Maximum bitrate UL> ,<Maximum
CO
bitrate DL> ,<Guaranteed bitrate UL>

,<Guaranteed bitrate DL> ,<Delivery
priority>

L218 AT DOCUMENT
[…]]
+CGEQREQ=? +CGEQREQ: <PDP_type>, (list of
supported <Traffic class>s) ,(list of
supported <Maximum bitrate UL>s),
(list
of supported <Maximum bitrate DL>s),
(list of supported <Guaranteed bitrate
UL>s), (list of supported <Guaranteed
bitrate DL>s),(list of supported
<Delivery order>s) ,(list of supported
<Maximum SDU size>s) ,(list of
supported <SDU error ratio>s) ,(list
of
supported <Residual bit error ratio>s)
AL
,(list of supported <Delivery of
erroneous SDUs>s) ,(list of supported
<Transfer delay>s) ,(list of supported
ID NQ
<Traffic handling priority>s)
TI [<CR><LF>+CGEQREQ: <PDP_type>, (list
of
N F LY
(list
EN
bitrate DL>s),(list of supported
of
[…]]
CO
7.16.2 Field
<cid>: (see +CGDCONT and _CGDSCONT commands) A special form of the set command,
+CGEQREQ= <cid> causes the requested profile for context number <cid> to become undefined.
<Traffic class>: a numeric parameter that indicates the type of application for which the UMTS bearer

L218 AT DOCUMENT
service is optimised.
0 - conversational
1 - streaming
2 - interactive
3 - background
4 - subscribed value
Other values are reserved.
<Maximum bitrate UL>: a numeric parameter that indicates the maximum number of kbits/s delivered to
UMTS (up-link traffic) at a SAP. As an example a bitrate of 32kbit/s would be specified as '32' (e.g.
AT+CGEQREQ=…,32, …).
<Maximum bitrate DL>: a numeric parameter that indicates the maximum number of kbits/s delivered by
UMTS (down-link traffic) at a SAP. As an example a bitrate of 32kbit/s would be specified as '32' (e.g.
AT+CGEQREQ=…,32, …). If the parameter is set to '0' the subscribed value will be requested.
<Guaranteed bitrate UL>: a numeric parameter that indicates the guaranteed number of kbits/s
AL
delivered to UMTS (up-link traffic) at a SAP (provided that there is data to deliver). As an example a
bitrate of 32kbit/s would be specified as '32' (e.g. AT+CGEQREQ=…,32, …). If the parameter is set to '0'
the subscribed value will be requested.
ID NQ
<Guaranteed bitrate DL>: a numeric parameter that indicates the guaranteed number of kbits/s
TI
delivered by UMTS (down-link traffic) at a SAP (provided that there is data to deliver). As an example a
bitrate of 32kbit/s would be specified as '32' (e.g. AT+CGEQREQ=…,32, …). If the parameter is set to '0'
<Delivery order>: a numeric parameter that indicates whether the UMTS bearer shall provide insequence
N F LY
SDU delivery or not.

EN
0 - no
1 - yes
2 - subscribed value.
<Maximum SDU size>: a numeric parameter (1,2,3,…) that indicates the maximum allowed SDU size in
octets.
If the parameter is set to '0' the subscribed value will be requested.
<SDU error ratio>: a string parameter that indicates the target value for the fraction of SDUs lost or
detected
as erroneous. SDU error ratio is defined only for conforming traffic. The value is specified as 'mEe'. As
an
example a target SDU error ratio of 5•10-3
would be specified as '5E3' (e.g. AT+CGEQREQ=…,'5E3',…). '0E0'
means subscribed value.
CO
<Residual bit error ratio>: a string parameter that indicates the target value for the undetected bit error
ratio in the delivered SDUs. If no error detection is requested, Residual bit error ratio indicates the bit
error ratio
in the delivered SDUs. The value is specified as 'mEe'. As an example a target residual bit error ratio of
5•10-3
would be specified as '5E3' (e.g. AT+CGEQREQ=…,'5E3',…). '0E0' means subscribed value.
<Delivery of erroneous SDUs>: a numeric parameter that indicates whether SDUs detected as

L218 AT DOCUMENT
erroneous shall be delivered or not.

0 - no
1 - yes
2 - no detect
3 - subscribed value
<Transfer delay>: a numeric parameter (0,1,2,…) that indicates the targeted time between request to
transfer an SDU at one SAP to its delivery at the other SAP, in milliseconds. If the parameter is set to '0'
<Traffic handling priority>: a numeric parameter (1,2,3,…) that specifies the relative importance for
handling of all SDUs belonging to the UMTS bearer compared to the SDUs of other bearers. If the
parameter is set to '0' the subscribed value will be requested.
<PDP_type>: (see +CGDCONT and +CGDSCONT commands).
AL
7.16.3 Support Note
1. It is only supported in R99 or later projects.

ID NQ
2. For the set/execute mode, all parameters must be entered. Part of parameters omitted will be
TI
treated as an undefined operation.
7.17 AT+CGEQREQ 3G Quality of Service Profile (Minimum

N F LY
EN
acceptable)
This command allows the TE to specify a minimum acceptable profile, which is checked by the
MT against the negotiated profile returned in the Activate/Modify PDP Context Accept message.
7.17.1 Format

+CGEQMIN=[<cid> OK
[,<Traffic class> ERROR
[,<Maximum bitrate UL>
[,<Maximum bitrate DL>
[,<Guaranteed bitrate UL>
CO
[,<Guaranteed bitrate DL>

[,<Delivery order>
[,<Maximum SDU size>
[,<SDU error ratio>
[,<Residual bit error
ratio> [,<Delivery of
erroneous SDUs>
[,<Transfer delay>
L218 AT DOCUMENT
[,<Traffic handling
priority>]]]]]]]]]]]]]
+CGEQMIN? +CGEQMIN: <cid>, <Traffic class>
,<Maximum bitrate UL>, <Maximum
bitrate
DL> ,<Guaranteed bitrate UL>
,<Guaranteed bitrate DL>, <Delivery
priority>
[<CR><LF>+CGEQMIN: <cid>, <Traffic
class> ,<Maximum bitrate UL> ,<Maximum
AL
bitrate DL> ,<Guaranteed bitrate UL>
,<Guaranteed bitrate DL>, <Delivery
ID NQ
TI ,<Delivery of erroneous SDUs>
priority>
[…]]
N F LY
+CGEQMIN=? +CGEQMIN: <PDP_type>, (list of

EN
supported <Maximum bitrate
UL>s) ,(list
bitrate DL>s) ,(list of supported
of
CO

[<CR><LF>+CGEQMIN: <PDP_type>, (list
of
(list

L218 AT DOCUMENT
of supported <Maximum bitrate DL>s)

,(list of supported <Guaranteed
bitrate
UL >s), (list of supported <Guaranteed
bitrate DL >s) ,(list of supported
of
AL
[…]]
ID NQ
7.17.2 Field TI
<cid>: (see +CGDCONT and _CGDSCONT commands) A special form of the set command,
+CGEQMIN= <cid> causes the requested profile for context number <cid> to become undefined.
<Traffic class>: a numeric parameter that indicates the type of application for which the UMTS bearer
N F LY
service is optimised.
EN
0 - conversational
1 - streaming
2 - interactive
3 - background
<Maximum bitrate UL>: a numeric parameter that indicates the maximum number of kbits/s delivered to
UMTS (up-link traffic) at a SAP. As an example a bitrate of 32kbit/s would be specified as '32' (e.g.
AT+CGEQMIN=…,32, …).
<Maximum bitrate DL>: a numeric parameter that indicates the maximum number of kbits/s delivered by
UMTS (down-link traffic) at a SAP. As an example a bitrate of 32kbit/s would be specified as '32' (e.g.
AT+CGEQMIN=…,32, …).
<Guaranteed bitrate UL>: a numeric parameter that indicates the guaranteed number of kbits/s
delivered to UMTS (up-link traffic) at a SAP (provided that there is data to deliver). As an example a
CO
bitrate of 32kbit/s would be specified as '32' (e.g. AT+CGEQMIN=…,32, …).

<Guaranteed bitrate DL>: a numeric parameter that indicates the guaranteed number of kbits/s
delivered by UMTS (down-link traffic) at a SAP (provided that there is data to deliver). As an example a
bitrate of 32kbit/s would be specified as '32' (e.g. AT+CGEQMIN=…,32, …).
<Delivery order>: a numeric parameter that indicates whether the UMTS bearer shall provide insequence
SDU delivery or not.
0 - no
1 - yes

L218 AT DOCUMENT

<Maximum SDU size>: a numeric parameter (1,2,3,…) that indicates the maximum allowed SDU size in
octets.
<SDU error ratio>: a string parameter that indicates the target value for the fraction of SDUs lost or
detected as erroneous. SDU error ratio is defined only for conforming traffic. The value is specified as
'mEe'. As an example a target SDU error ratio of 5•10-3 would be specified as '5E3' (e.g.
AT+CGEQMIN=…,'5E3',…).
<Residual bit error ratio>: a string parameter that indicates the target value for the undetected bit error
ratio in the delivered SDUs. If no error detection is requested, Residual bit error ratio indicates the bit
error ratio in the delivered SDUs. The value is specified as 'mEe'. As an example a target residual bit
error ratio of 5•10-3 would be specified as '5E3' (e.g. AT+CGEQMIN=…,'5E3',…).
<Delivery of erroneous SDUs>: a numeric parameter that indicates whether SDUs detected as
erroneous shall be delivered or not.
0 - no
AL
1 - yes
2 - no detect
ID NQ
<Transfer delay>: a numeric parameter (0,1,2,…) that indicates the targeted time between request to
TI
transfer an SDU at one SAP to its delivery at the other SAP, in milliseconds. <Traffic handling priority>: a
numeric parameter (1,2,3,…) that specifies the relative importance for handling of all SDUs belonging to
the UMTS bearer compared to the SDUs of other bearers.
<PDP_type>: (see +CGDCONT and +CGDSCONT commands).
N F LY
EN
7.17.3 Support Note
1. It is only supported in R99 or later projects.

2. For the set/execute mode, all parameters must be entered. Part of parameters omitted will be
treated as an undefined operation.
CO

L218 AT DOCUMENT
8 Mobile Termination Errors
8.1 AT+CMEE
Set command disables or enables the use of result code +CME ERROR: <err> as an
indication of an error relating to the functionality of the MT. When enabled, MT related errors
cause +CME ERROR: <err> final result code instead of the regular ERROR final result code.
ERROR is returned normally when error is related to syntax, invalid parameters, or TA
functionality.
Test command returns values supported as a compound value.
AL
8.1.1 Format
ID NQ
+CMEE=[<n>]
+CMEE?
+CMEE=?
TI
+CMEE: <n>
+CMEE: (list of supported <n>s)
N F LY
EN
8.1.2 Field
<n>:
0 disable +CME ERROR: <err> result code and use ERROR instead
1enable +CME ERROR: <err> result code and use numeric <err> values (refer next subclause)
2enable +CME ERROR: <err> result code and use verbose <err> values (refer next subclause)
<err> values (numeric format followed by verbose format):
9.2.1 General errors
0 phone failure
1 no connection to phone
2 phone adaptor link reserved
3 operation not allowed
4 operation not supported
CO
5 PH SIM PIN required

6 PH-FSIM PIN required
7 PH-FSIM PUK required
10 SIM not inserted
11 SIM PIN required
12 SIM PUK required
13 SIM failure
14 SIM busy
L218 AT DOCUMENT
15 SIM wrong
16 incorrect password
17 SIM PIN2 required
18 SIM PUK2 required
20 memory full
21 invalid index
22 not found
23 memory failure
24 text string too long
25 invalid characters in text string
26 dial string too long
27 invalid characters in dial string
30 no network service
31 network timeout
AL
32 network not allowed - emergency calls only
40 network personalization PIN required
41 network personalization PUK required
ID NQ
42 network subset personalization PIN required
TI
43 network subset personalization PUK required
44 service provider personalization PIN required
45 service provider personalization PUK required
46 corporate personalization PIN required
N F LY
47 corporate personalization PUK required

EN
48 hidden key required (NOTE: This key is required when accessing hidden phonebook
entries.)
100 unknown
9.2.2 GPRS-related errors
9.2.2.1 Errors related to a failure to perform an Attach
103 Illegal MS (#3)
106 Illegal ME (#6)
107 GPRS service not allowed (#7)
111 PLMN not allowed (#11)
112 Location area not allowed (#12)
113 Roaming not allowed in this location area (#13)
(Values in parentheses are TS 24.008 cause codes.)
9.2.2.2 Errors related to a failure to Activate a Context
132 service option not supported (#32)
CO
133 requested service option not subscribed (#33)

134 service option temporarily out of order (#34)
149 PDP authentication failure
(Values in parentheses are TS 24.008 cause codes.)
9.2.2.3 Other GPRS errors
150 invalid mobile class
148 unspecified GPRS error

L218 AT DOCUMENT
Other values in the range 101-150 are reserved for use by GPRS
AL
ID NQ
TI
N F LY
EN
CO

L218 AT DOCUMENT
9 Annex C(27.007)
9.1 AT+FCLASS
Puts the TA in a specific mode of operation. This causes the TA to process information in a
manner suitable for that type of information.
9.1.1 Format
Command Response
AL
+FCLASS=<n>
+FCLASS? <n>
ID NQ
+FCLASS=? (list of supported <n>s)
TI
9.1.2 Field
N F LY
EN
<n> Mode
0 data
1 fax class 1 (TIA-578-A)
2 fax (manufacturer specific)
2.0 fax class 2 (ITU T T.32 [12] and TIA 592)
9.2 AT+VTS
Allows the transmission of DTMF tones. The command is write-only.

Note: The command is used only during voice calls.
9.2.1 Format
CO
Command Return
+VTS=<dtmf>
+VTS=? (list of supported <tone1>s),(list of
supported <tone2>s) ,(list of
supported <duration>s)

L218 AT DOCUMENT
9.2.2 Field
<DTMF>. A single ASCII character in the set .0-9, #, *, A-D.

For example: AT+VTS = 9 or AT+VTS = A
You can use multiple command to achieve continuous DTMF tones.
For example : AT+VTS=6;+VTS=2;+VTS=8;+VTS=2
9.2.3 Note
When modem work with application (ex: WM smart phone RIL or ECMT tool) , the application
expect the result of AT+VTS is returned immediately . Since user might press keypad to send DTMF
very fast, so application would like to send DTMF before the previous DTMF is actually processed in
NW (modem shall help to queue the DTMF request if previous is not finished yet). So we will
AL
response the result code immediately to prevent blocking the application‘s DTMF keypad handling.
Currently, we only check if the digit is valid and if there is any call ongoing(ex: dialing , active
exist). If yes, then we will return "OK". But please notice the "OK" doesn‘t imply that the DTMF is
ID NQ
really processed successfully in NW. ex: it might fail due to MS doesn‘t have user connection yet. Or
TI
it might be fail due to there is no response from NW. Or it might be fail due to there is no speech
channel (ex: data call) If __VTS_LATE_RESPONSE__ is turned on, "OK" is printed when SEND
DTMF is acknowledged by network
N F LY
EN
CO

L218 AT DOCUMENT
10 SMS AT Commands(27.005)
Please refer to 27.005 Sec 3.1 Parameter Definition to see more details of the parameter fields
in each command.
10.1 AT+CSMS Select Message Service
Selects the message service and returns the type of messages supported by the ME. If
chosen service is not supported by the ME (but supported by the TA), +CME ERROR is
returned.
AL
10.1.1 Format

ID NQ
+CSMS=<service>
+CSMS?
TI +CSMS: <mt>,<mo>,<bm>
+CMS ERROR: <err>
+CSMS: <service>,<mt>,<mo>,<bm>
+CSMS=? +CSMS: (list of supported <service>s)
N F LY
EN
10.1.2 Field
<service>:
0 3GPP TS 23.040 [3] and 3GPP TS 23.041 [4]
1 3GPP TS 23.040 [3] and 3GPP TS 23.041 [4]
the requirement of <service> setting 1 is mentioned under corresponding command
descriptions)
<mt>, <mo>, <bm>:
0 type not supported
1 type supported
10.1.3 Note
CO
1. We don‘t support "+CMS ERROR" when AT command set is SLIM_AT or ULC_AT.
10.2 AT+CPMS Preferred Message Storage
Selects memory storage spaces to be used for reading, writing, etc. If chosen storage is not
appropriate for the ME (but is supported by the TA), +CME ERROR is returned.
L218 AT DOCUMENT
10.2.1 Format

+CPMS=<mem1> +CPMS:
<used1>,<total1>,<used2>,<total2>,<used3>,<total
3>
+CMS ERROR: <err>
+CPMS? +CPMS:
<mem1>,<used1>,<total1>,<mem2>,<used2>,<total2>,
<mem3>,<used3>,<total3>
+CMS ERROR: <err>
+CPMS=? +CPMS: (list of supported <mem1>s),(list of supported
<mem2>s),
AL
(list of supported <mem3>s)
10.2.2 Note
ID NQ
TI
1. We don‘t support "+CMS ERROR" when AT command set is SLIM_AT or ULC_AT
10.3 AT+CMGF Message Format

N F LY
EN
Sets the input and output format to be used by the TA.
10.3.1 Format

+CMGF=[<mode>]
+CMGF? +CMGF: <mode>
+CMGF=? +CMGF: (list of supported <mode>s)
10.3.2 Field
CO
<mode>:
0 PDU mode (default when implemented)
1 text mode
10.3.3 Note

L218 AT DOCUMENT
10.4 AT+CSCA Service Center Address
Updates the SMCS address, through which mobile-originated SMSs are transmitted. In text
mode, the setting is used by send (AT+CMGS) and write (AT+CMGW) commands. In PDU mode,
the setting is used by the same commands, but only when the length of the SMCS
address (coded into <pdu> parameter) equals zero.
10.4.1 Format

+CSCA=<sca>[,<tosca>]
+CSCA? +CSCA: <sca>,<tosca>
AL
+CSCA=?
10.4.2 Note
ID NQ
TI
10.5 AT+CSMP Set Text Mode Parameters

N F LY
EN
10.5.1 Description
Setting Text Mode Parameters. Set command is used to select values for additional
parameters needed when SM is sent to the network or placed in a storage when text format
message mode is selected. It is possible to set the validity period starting from when the SM
is received by the SMSC (<vp> is in range 0... 255) or define the absolute time of the validity
period termination (<vp> is a string). The format of <vp> is given by <fo>.
10.5.2 Format

+CSMP=[<fo>[,<vp>[,<pid>[,<dcs>]]]]
CO
+CSMP? +CSMP:
<fo>,<vp>,<pid>,<dcs>
+CSMP=?

L218 AT DOCUMENT
10.5.3 Note
10.6 AT+CSDH Show Text Mode Parameters
Set command controls whether detailed header information is shown in text mode result
codes.
Test command returns supported values as a compound value.
10.6.1 Format
AL
+CSDH=[<show>]
+CSDH? +CSDH: <show>
+CSDH=? +CSDH: (list of supported <show>s)
ID NQ
10.6.2 Note
TI
N F LY

EN
10.7 AT+CSCB Select Cell Broadcast Message Types
Selects which types of CBMs are to be received by the ME.
10.7.1 Format

+CSCB=[<mode>[,<mids>]]
+CSCB? +CSCB: <mode>,<mids>
+CSCB=? +CSCB: (list of supported <mode>s)
CO
10.7.2 Field
<mode>:
0 message types specified in <mids> and <dcss> are accepted
1 message types specified in <mids> and <dcss> are not accepted
<mids>: We support 10 message identifiers at most.
string type: all different possible combinations of CBM message identifiers (refer <mid>)
L218 AT DOCUMENT
(default is empty string);

e.g. "0,1,5,320-478,922"
<dcss>: string type; all different possible combinations of CBM data coding schemes (refer
<dcs>) (default is empty string);e.g. "0-3,5"
10.7.3 Note1
For <mids> of <mode>=0, our design is to open the <mids> from user input and close other <mids>.
In the following case, user input <mode>=0 and <mids>=2. So open channel 2 and close other
channel (channel 1).
AT+CSCB?
+CSCB: 0,"1","1"
OK
AL
AT+CSCB=0,"2","2"
OK
AT+CSCB?
+CSCB: 0,"2","1,2"
ID NQ
OK TI
In the following case, user input <mode>=0 without <mids>. So don‘t open any channel and close
other channel (channel 1).
AT+CSCB?
+CSCB: 0,"1","1"
N F LY
OK
EN
AT+CSCB=0
OK
AT+CSCB?
+CSCB: 0,"","1"
OK
For <dcss> of <mode>=0, our design is to increase the <dcss> from user input.
In the following case, user input <mode>=0 and <dcss>=2. So increase language 2.
AT+CSCB?
+CSCB: 0,"1","1"
OK
AT+CSCB=0,"2","2"
OK
AT+CSCB?
CO
+CSCB: 0,"2","1,2"
OK
In the following case, user input <mode>=0 without <dcss>. So don‘t increase any language.
AT+CSCB?
+CSCB: 0,"1","1"
OK
AT+CSCB=0
OK

L218 AT DOCUMENT
AT+CSCB?
+CSCB: 0,"","1"
OK
10.7.4 Note2
For <mids> of <mode>=1, our design is to close all <mids> no matter with <mids> or not.
In the following case, user input <mode>=1. So close all channel.
AT+CSCB?
+CSCB: 0,"2","1,2"
OK
AT+CSCB=1,"2","2"
OK
AL
AT+CSCB?
+CSCB: 1,"","1"
OK
In the following case, user input <mode>=1 without <mids>. Also close all channel.
ID NQ
AT+CSCB? TI
+CSCB: 0,"1","1"
OK
AT+CSCB=1
OK
N F LY
AT+CSCB?
EN
+CSCB: 1,"","1"
OK
For <dcss> of <mode>=1, our design is to decrease the <dcss> from user input.
In the following case, user input <mode>=1 and <dcss>=2. So decrease language 2.
AT+CSCB?
+CSCB: 0,"2","1,2"
OK
AT+CSCB=1,"2","2"
OK
AT+CSCB?
+CSCB: 1,"","1"
OK
In the following case, user input <mode>=1 without <dcss>. So don‘t decrease any language.
CO
AT+CSCB?
+CSCB: 0,"1","1"
OK
AT+CSCB=1
OK
AT+CSCB?
+CSCB: 1,"","1"
OK

L218 AT DOCUMENT
N/A
10.7.4.2 Usage Note
<mid> 3GPP TS 23.041 CBM Message Identifier in integer format

<dcs> depending on the command or result code: 3GPP TS 23.038 SM Data Coding Scheme
(default 0), or Cell Broadcast Data Coding Scheme in integer format
We don‘t support "+CMS ERROR" when AT command set is SLIM_AT or ULC_AT
10.8 AT+CSAS Save Settings
AL
Execution command saves active message service settings to a non-volatile memory.
Settings specified in commands Service Centre Address +CSCA, Set Message Parameters
+CSMP and Select Cell Broadcast Message Types +CSCB (if implemented) are saved. Certain
ID NQ
settings may not be supported by the storage (e.g. (U)SIM SMS parameters) and therefore can not
TI
be saved.
10.8.1 Format
N F LY
EN
+CSAS[=<profile>] +CMS ERROR: <err>
+CSAS=? +CSAS: (list of supported <profile>s)
10.8.2 Field
<profile>:
0...255 manufacturer specific profile number where settings are to be stored
10.8.3 Note

CO
10.9 AT+CRES Restore Settings
Execution command restores message service settings from non-volatile memory to active
memory. A TA can contain several profiles of settings. Settings specified in commands Service
Centre Address +CSCA, Set Message Parameters +CSMP and Select Cell Broadcast Message
Types +CSCB (if implemented) are restored. Certain settings may not be supported by the storage
L218 AT DOCUMENT
(e.g. (U)SIM SMS parameters) and therefore can not be restored.
10.9.1 Format

+CRES[=<profile>] +CMS ERROR: <err>
+CRES=? +CRES: (list of supported <profile>s)
10.9.2 Field
<profile>:
0...255 manufacturer specific profile number where settings are to be stored
AL
10.9.3 Note
ID NQ
TI
10.10 AT+CNMI New Message Indications to TE
N F LY
Selects the procedure how the reception of new messages from the network is indicated to the
EN
TE when TE is active (DTR signal is ON). IF TE is inactive (DTR signal OFF), message
reception is carried out as specified in GSM 03.38. This command enables the unsolicited
result codes +CMT, +CMTI, +CBM, and +CDS. (Please refer to 07.07 for more detail)
10.10.1 Format

+CNMI=[<mode>[,<mt>[,<bm> +CMS ERROR: <err>
[,<ds> [,<bfr>]]]]]
+CNMI? +CNMI: <mode>,<mt>,<bm>,<ds>,<bfr>
+CNMI=? +CNMI: (list of supported <mode>s),(list of
supported <mt>s),(list of supported
<bm>s),(list of supported <ds>s),(list of
CO
supported <bfr>s)
10.10.2 Field
<mode>
0 disable unsolicited result code

L218 AT DOCUMENT
1 Discard indication and reject new received message unsolicited result codes when
TA-TE link is
reserved (e.g. in on-line data mode). Otherwise forward them directly to the TE.
2 Buffer unsolicited result codes in the TA when TA-TE link is reserved (e.g. in on-line
data mode) and
flush them to the TE after reservation. Otherwise forward them directly to the TE.
3 Forward unsolicited result codes directly to the TE. TA-TE link specific inband
technique used to
embed result codes and data when TA is in on-line data mode.
<mt>
0 No SMS-DELIVER indications are routed to the TE.
1 If SMS-DELIVER is stored into ME/TA, indication of the memory location is routed to
the TE using
unsolicited result code: +CMTI: <mem>,<index>
AL
2 SMS-DELIVERs (except class 2 messages and messages in the message waiting
indication group
(store message)) are routed directly to the TE using unsolicited result code:
ID NQ
+CMT: [<alpha>],<length><CR><LF><pdu> (PDU mode enabled); or
TI
+CMT: <oa>, [<alpha>],<scts>[,<tooa>,<fo>,<pid>,<dcs>,<sca>,<tosca>, <length>]
<CR><LF> <data> (text mode enabled; about parameters in italics, refer command
Show Text Mode Parameters +CSDH)
3 Class 3 SMS-DELIVERs are routed directly to TE using unsolicited result codes
N F LY
defined in <mt>=2. Messages of other data coding schemes result in indication as

EN
defined in <mt>=1.
<bm>
0 No CBM indications are routed to the TE.
2 New CBMs are routed directly to the TE using unsolicited result code:
+CBM: <length><CR><LF><pdu> (PDU mode enabled); or
+CBM: <sn>,<mid>,<dcs>,<page>,<pages><CR><LF><data> (text mode enabled)
If ME supports data coding groups which define special routing also for messages
other than class 3 (e.g. (U)SIM specific messages), ME may choose not to route
messages of such data coding schemes into TE (indication of a stored CBM may be
given as defined in <bm>=1).
3 Class 3 CBMs are routed directly to TE using unsolicited result codes defined in
<bm>=2. If CBM
storage is supported, messages of other classes result in indication as defined in
<bm>=1.
CO
<ds>:
0 No SMS-STATUS-REPORTs are routed to the TE.
1 SMS-STATUS-REPORTs are routed to the TE using unsolicited result code:
+CDS: <length><CR><LF><pdu> (PDU mode enabled); or
+CDS: <fo>,<mr>,[<ra>],[<tora>],<scts>,<dt>,<st> (text mode enabled)
<bfr>:
0 TA buffer of unsolicited result codes defined within this command is flushed to the TE

L218 AT DOCUMENT
when <mode>
1...3 is entered (OK response shall be given before flushing the codes).
1 TA buffer of unsolicited result codes defined within this command is cleared when
<mode> 1...3 is
entered.
10.10.3 Note
10.11 AT+CMGL(Text mode) List Message
Returns messages with status value <stat> from returned message in preferred storage to the
AL
TE.
10.11.1 Format
ID NQ
Command
+CMGL[=<stat>]
TI Possible response(s)
if text mode (+CMGF=1), command successful and
SMS-SUBMITs and/or
SMS-DELIVERs:
N F LY
EN
+CMGL:
<index>,<stat>,<oa/da>,[<alpha>],[<scts>][,<tooa/toda>,
<length>]<CR><LF><data>[<CR><LF>
+CMGL:
<index>,<stat>,<da/oa>,[<alpha>],[<scts>][,<tooa/toda>,
<length>]<CR><LF><data>[...]]
SMS-STATUS-REPORTs:
+CMGL:
<index>,<stat>,<fo>,<mr>,[<ra>],[<tora>],<scts>,<dt>,<st>
[<CR><LF>
+CMGL:
<index>,<stat>,<fo>,<mr>,[<ra>],[<tora>],<scts>,<dt>,<st>
[...]]
CO

SMS-COMMANDs:
+CMGL: <index>,<stat>,<fo>,<ct>[<CR><LF>
+CMGL: <index>,<stat>,<fo>,<ct>[...]]
CBM storage:
+CMGL: <index>,<stat>,<sn>,<mid>,<page>,<pages>
<CR><LF><data>[<CR><LF>
L218 AT DOCUMENT
+CMGL: <index>,<stat>,<sn>,<mid>,<page>,<pages>
<CR><LF><data>[...]]
otherwise:
+CMS ERROR: <err>
+CMGL=? +CMGL: (list of supported <stat>s)
10.11.2 Note
10.12 AT+CMGL(PDU mode) List Message
AL
Returns messages with status value <stat> from returned message in preferred storage to the
TE.
ID NQ
10.12.1 Format TI
+CMGL[=<stat>] if PDU mode (+CMGF=0) and command successful:
N F LY
+CMGL: <index>,<stat>,[<alpha>],<length><CR><LF><pdu>
EN
[<CR><LF>+CMGL:<index>,<stat>,[<alpha>],<length><CR><LF><pdu>
[...]]
otherwise:
+CMS ERROR: <err>
+CMGL=? +CMGL: (list of supported <stat>s)
10.12.2 Note
10.13 AT+CMGR(Text mode) Read Message

CO
Returns messages with location value <index> from preferred message storage <mem1> to the
TE. If the status of the message is .received unread., the status in the storage changes
to .received read.. If reading fails, +CMS ERROR is returned.
10.13.1 Format

L218 AT DOCUMENT
+CMGR=<index> if text mode (+CMGF=1), command successful and

SMS-DELIVER:
+CMGR:
<stat>,<oa>,[<alpha>],<scts>[,<tooa>,<fo>,<pid>,<dcs>,
<sca>,<tosca>,<length>]<CR><LF><data>
SMS-SUBMIT:
+CMGR:
<stat>,<da>,[<alpha>][,<toda>,<fo>,<pid>,<dcs>,[<vp>],
<sca>,<tosca>,<length>]<CR><LF><data>
SMS-STATUSREPORT:
+CMGR:
<stat>,<fo>,<mr>,[<ra>],[<tora>],<scts>,<dt>,<st>
AL
SMS-COMMAND:
+CMGR:
ID NQ
<stat>,<fo>,<ct>[,<pid>,[<mn>],[<da>],[<toda>],<length>
TI <CR><LF><cdata>]
if text mode (+CMGF=1), command successful and CBM
storage:
+CMGR:
N F LY
<stat>,<sn>,<mid>,<dcs>,<page>,<pages><CR><LF><data>
EN
otherwise:
+CMS ERROR: <err>
+CMGR=?
10.13.2 Note
10.14 AT+CMGR(PDU mode) Read Message
CO
to .received read.. If reading fails, +CMS ERROR is returned.
10.14.1 Format
+CMGR=<index> if PDU mode (+CMGF=0) and command successful:

L218 AT DOCUMENT
+CMGR: <stat>,[<alpha>],<length><CR><LF><pdu>
otherwise:
+CMS ERROR: <err>
+CMGR=?
10.14.2 Note
10.15 AT+CNMA(Text mode) New Message Acknowledgement to
ME/TA
AL
Execution command confirms correct reception of a new message (SMS-DELIVER or
SMSSTATUS-REPORT) which is routed directly to the TE. This acknowledgement command
ID NQ
(causing ME to send RP-ACK to the network) shall be used when +CSMS parameter
TI
<service> equals 1.
10.15.1 Format
N F LY
EN
if text mode (+CMGF=1): +CMS ERROR: <err>
+CNMA
+CNMA=?
10.15.2 Note
10.16 AT+CNMA(PDU mode) New Message Acknowledgement to
ME/TA
CO
Execution command confirms correct reception of a new message (SMS-DELIVER or

SMSSTATUS-REPORT) which is routed directly to the TE This acknowledgement command
(causing ME to send RP-ACK to the network) shall be used when +CSMS parameter
<service> equals 1.

L218 AT DOCUMENT
10.16.1 Format

if PDU mode (+CMGF=0): +CMS ERROR: <err>
+CNMA[=<n>[,<length>[<CR>
PDU is given<ctrl-
Z/ESC>]]]
+CNMA=? if PDU mode (+CMGF=0):
+CNMA: (list of supported
<n>s)
10.16.2 Note
AL
ID NQ
10.17 AT+CMGS(Text mode) Send Message
TI
Execution command sends message from a TE to the network (SMS-SUBMIT). Message
reference value <mr> is returned to the TE on successful message delivery.
N F LY
EN
10.17.1 Format

if text mode (+CMGF=1): if text mode (+CMGF=1) and sending
+CMGS=<da>[,<toda>]<CR> successful:
text is entered<ctrl- +CMGS: <mr>[,<scts>]
Z/ESC> if sending fails:
+CMS ERROR: <err>
+CMGS=?
10.17.2 Note
CO
10.18 AT+CMGS(PDU mode) Send Message
Execution command sends message from a TE to the network (SMS-SUBMIT). Message

reference value <mr> is returned to the TE on successful message delivery.

L218 AT DOCUMENT
10.18.1 Format

if PDU mode (+CMGF=0): if PDU mode (+CMGF=0) and sending successful:
+CMGS=<length><CR> +CMGS: <mr>[,<ackpdu>]
PDU is given<ctrl-Z/ESC> if sending fails:
+CMS ERROR: <err>
+CMGS=?
10.18.2 Note
AL
10.19 AT+CMSS(Text mode) Send Message from Storage
ID NQ
Execution command sends message with location value <index> from preferred message
TI
storage <mem2> to the network (SMS-SUBMIT or SMS-COMMAND). If new recipient address <da>
is given for SMS-SUBMIT, it shall be used instead of the one stored with the message. Reference
value <mr> is returned to the TE on successful message delivery.
N F LY
EN
10.19.1 Format

+CMSS=<index>[,<da>[,<toda> if text mode (+CMGF=1) and sending
]] successful:
+CMSS: <mr>[,<scts>]
if sending fails:
+CMS ERROR: <err>
+CMSS=?
10.19.2 Note
CO
10.20 AT+CMSS(PDU mode) Send Message from Storage
Execution command sends message with location value <index> from message storage
<mem2> to the network (SMS-SUBMIT or SMS-COMMAND). If new recipient address <da> is
given for SMS-SUBMIT, it shall be used instead of the one stored with the message. Reference

L218 AT DOCUMENT
value <mr> is returned to the TE on successful message delivery.
10.20.1 Format

+CMSS=<index>[,<da>[,<toda>] if PDU mode (+CMGF=0) and sending
] successful:
+CMSS: <mr>[,<ackpdu>]
if sending fails:
+CMS ERROR: <err>
+CMSS=?
AL
10.20.2 Note

ID NQ
TI
10.21 AT+CMGW(Text mode) Write Message to Memory
Execution command stores a message to memory storage <mem2>. Memory location

N F LY
<index> of the stored message is returned. By default message status will be set to 'stored
EN
unsent', but parameter <stat> allows also other status values to be given, support "stored"
unsent‘ and "stored sent"
10.21.1 Format

if text mode (+CMGF=1): +CMGW: <index>
+CMGW[=<oa/da>[,<tooa/toda>[,<stat>]]]<CR> +CMS ERROR: <err>
text is entered<ctrl-Z/ESC>
+CMGW=?
10.21.2 Note
CO
10.22 AT+CMGW(PDU mode) Write Message to Memory
Execution command stores a message to memory storage <mem2>. Memory location

<index> of the stored message is returned. By default message status will be set to 'stored

L218 AT DOCUMENT
unsent', but parameter <stat> allows also other status values to be given, support 'stored unsent'
and "stored sent"
10.22.1 Format

if PDU mode (+CMGF=0): +CMGW: <index>
+CMGW=<length>[,<stat>]<CR>PDU is given +CMS ERROR: <err>
<ctrl-Z/ESC>
+CMGW=?
10.22.2 Field
AL
<stat> integer type in PDU mode (default 0), or string type in text mode (default "REC UNREAD");
indicates
ID NQ
the status of message in memory; defined values:
TI
0 "REC UNREAD" received unread message (i.e. new message)
1 "REC READ" received read message
2 "STO UNSENT" stored unsent message (only applicable to SMs)
3 "STO SENT" stored sent message (only applicable to SMs)
N F LY
4 "ALL" all messages (only applicable to +CMGL command)

EN
7 "DRAFT"
10.22.3 Note
7 "DRAFT" of <stat> is available from 09B.1017MP
10.22.3.2 Usage Note
is only supported for phone suite. Others can‘t use this command to do test.
We don‘t support "+CMS ERROR" when AT command set is SLIM_AT or ULC_AT
CO
10.23 AT+CMGD Delete Message
Deletes message from preferred message <mem1> (see AT+CPMS) storage location <index>.
If deletion fails, +CMS ERROR is returned.

L218 AT DOCUMENT
10.23.1 Format

+CMGD=<index>[,<delflag>] +CMS ERROR: <err>
+CMGD=? +CMGD: (list of supported
<index>s)[,(list of
supported <delflag>s)]
10.23.2 Field
<delflag>: an integer indicating multiple message deletion request as follows:

0 (or omitted) Delete the message specified in <index>
AL
1 Delete all read messages from preferred message storage,
leaving unread messages and stored mobile originated messages (whether sent or not)
untouched
ID NQ
2 Delete all read messages from preferred message storage and sent mobile originated
TI
messages,
leaving unread messages and unsent mobile originated messages untouched
3 Delete all read messages from preferred message storage, sent and unsent mobile originated
messages
N F LY
leaving unread messages untouched.

EN
4 Delete all messages from preferred message storage including unread messages.
10.23.3 Note
10.24 AT+CMGC(Text mode) Send Command
Execution command sends a command message from a TE to the network (SMSCOMMAND).
10.24.1 Format
CO

if text mode (+CMGF=1): if text mode (+CMGF=1) and
+CMGC=<fo>,<ct>[,<pid>[,<mn>[,<da>[,< sending successful:
toda>]]]]<CR> +CMGC: <mr>[,<scts>]
text is entered<ctrl-Z/ESC> if sending fails:
+CMS ERROR: <err>
+CMGC=?

L218 AT DOCUMENT
10.24.2 Note
10.25 AT+CMGC(PDU mode) Send Command
Execution command sends a command message from a TE to the network (SMSCOMMAND).
10.25.1 Format

if PDU mode (+CMGF=0): if PDU mode (+CMGF=0) and sending
AL
+CMGC=<length><CR> successful:
PDU is given<ctrl-Z/ESC> +CMGC: <mr>[,<ackpdu>]
if sending fails:
+CMS ERROR: <err>
ID NQ
+CMGC=?
TI
10.25.2 Note
N F LY
EN
10.26 AT+CMMS More Message to Send
Set command controls the continuity of SMS relay protocol link. When feature is enabled
(and supported by network) multiple messages can be sent much faster as link is kept open.
Test command returns supported values as a compound value.
10.26.1 Format

+CMMS=[<n>]
+CMMS? +CMMS: <n>
CO
+CMMS=? +CMMS: (list of supported <n>s)
10.26.2 Field
<n>:
0 disable
L218 AT DOCUMENT
2 enable (if the time between the response of the latest message send command and
the next send command exceeds 1-5 seconds (the exact value is up to ME
implementation), ME shall close the link but TA shall not switch automatically back to
<n>=0)
10.26.3 Note
10.27 AT+EQSI Query storage index
To query storage index.
AL
10.27.1 Format

ID NQ
+EQSI=<storage>TI +EQSI: <storage>, <begin>, <end>,
<used>
OK/ERROR
+EQSI=? +ESUO: (list of supported
N F LY
<storage>s)
EN
10.27.2 Field
<storage>: string type; SM or ME

<begin>: beginning of index
<end>: ending of index
<used>: number of messages in <storage>
10.27.3 Note

CO
This command is only supported for phone suite. Others can‘t use this command to do test.

L218 AT DOCUMENT
10.28 AT+EMGR(PDU mode) Read Message (for phone suite)
to .received read.. If reading fails, +CMS ERROR is returned. It is similar with AT+CMGR
(PDU mode). <stat> is different.
10.28.1 Format

+EMGR=<index> if PDU mode (+CMGF=0) and command successful:
+EMGR: <stat>,[<alpha>],<length><CR><LF><pdu>
AL
otherwise:
+CMS ERROR: <err>
+EMGR=?
ID NQ
10.28.2 Field
TI
<stat> integer type in PDU mode (default 0), or string type in text mode (default "REC UNREAD");
N F LY
indicates
EN
the status of message in memory; defined values:
0 "REC UNREAD" received unread message (i.e. new message)
1 "REC READ" received read message
2 "STO UNSENT" stored unsent message (only applicable to SMs)
3 "STO SENT" stored sent message (only applicable to SMs)
4 "ALL" all messages (only applicable to +CMGL command)
7 "DRAFT"
10.28.3 Note

CO
This command is only supported for phone suite. Others can‘t use this command to do test.

L218 AT DOCUMENT
11 Hardware Testing AT Commands
These AT commands are designed for tools to do factory hardware testing and should be
tested exclusively. Test only one command/item at the same time.
11.1 AT+CASP Audio Sound Playback
This command handles the Audio Sound Play operation. We use this command to playback one
exist audio ring sound. The sound id should refer to the existing ring sound number. You have to
make sure the source ID is correct, otherwise it won‘t have any response.
AL
11.1.1 Format
Execution command : AT+CASP = <op>,<sound_id>[,<style> [, <timeout>] ]

ID NQ
Test command : AT+CASP =? Show if the command is supported
11.1.2 Field
TI
N F LY
Type Short name Long name Parameter/comment

EN
Integer op operation 2 Stop one audio ring sound
1 Play one audio ring sound
Integer id Sound id
integer style Play back style 0 CRESCENDO
(When op= 1 1 INFINITE
required) 2 ONCE
3 DESCENDO(NS)
Integer Timeout Timeout timer 1-25 Seconds (Apply to all
style. no default value:
if not given, it will keep
playing)
CO
11.1.3 Response
Test command : +CASP: <op>,<sound_id>[,<style>,<timeout>]

Execution command : OK | ERROR | +CME ERROR: <err>
Example1:
at+casp=?
+CASP: <1-2>,<id>[,<0-3>[,<1-25>]]

L218 AT DOCUMENT
OK
at+casp=1,151,0,3 (撥放3 秒會停止)
OK
at+casp=1,152,2 (撥一輪once)
OK
at+casp=1,153,3,10 (撥放10 秒會停止)
OK
at+casp=1,5,1 (tone 會一直持續)
OK
at+casp=2,5 (stop the tone)
OK
Note: From W10.05 , we don‘t support playing ringtone (sound id > 80)
AL
11.2 AT+EADP Set / Get Audio Profile
This Command is used to set and get audio profile command.

ID NQ
11.2.1 Format
TI
Execution command : AT+ EADP = <op>,<mode>,<audio type>,<level>,[<gain>]
Test command : AT+ EADP =? Show if the command is supported
N F LY
EN
11.2.2 Field

integer Op operation Get 0
Set 1
integer mode audio mode Normal mode 0
Headset mode 1
Loud speaker 2
mode
integer type audio type Melody 0
Keytone 1
Speech 2
mic 3
CO
sidetone 4
integer level volume level 0-6
(when type = mic or sidetone,
volume level = 0 )
integer gain gain value 0-255

L218 AT DOCUMENT
11.2.3 Response
Test command : +EADP: (0,1),(0-2),(0-4),(0-6),(0-255)

Example:
1. Get Audio mode with Normal Mode , Melody type, volume level is 0.
The return value with gain 40
at+eadp=0,0,0,0
+EADP: 40
OK
2.Set Normal Mode , Melody type, volume level with 0 and gain is 99
at+eadp=1,0,0,0,99
OK
AL
2.Set HeadSet Mode , Mic type, gain is 60
at+eadp=1,1,3,0,60
OK
ID NQ
11.2.4 Note
TI
1. This command is supposed to be executed only from SIM1. Do not execute it when the UART
setting is SIM2.
N F LY
2. AT+EADP is a seldom use AT command before 11AW11.09. In order to save code size (ROM
EN
size) ,
we default disable the command in low cost projects (LOW_COST_SUPPORT is defined). If you
need
this command, please ask PM to enable this command support ( update L4 library).
3. After 11AW11.09 this command is default on, but mainly for MTK internal tool. This command
together with +EAPS is designed for MediaTek speech tuning tool. For any other usage please take
care and make sure you know the right way and right command order.
11.3 AT+EAPS Audio Parameter Setting
This command is used to get/set Audio parameter like Input/output FIR, Speech common para,
Speech mode.
CO
11.3.1 Format
Execution command : AT+EAPS=<op>,<para1>,[<para2>,[<para3>]]<setting>

Test command : AT+ EAPS =? Show if the command is supported

L218 AT DOCUMENT
11.3.2 Field

Integer op Operation 0 Get old value
1 Set New value
integer para1 Parameter1 0 Input FIR Coeffs
1 Output FIR Coeffs
2 FIR output Index
3 Speech Common Para
4 Speech mode Para
integer para2 Parameter2 - when para1=0/1/4,
para2 is a must
integer para3 Parameter3 - When para1=0/1, para3
AL
is a must
integer setting Setting - When op=1,
<setting>is a must
ID NQ
TI
11.3.3 Detailed explanation
When para1=0/1, users can set/get Input/Output FIR of handset, Because there are 6 group of
N F LY
FIR parameter, so para2 is a must and it‘s range is 0~5 to specify which group of FIR to get/set.
EN
And each group of FIR has more than 10 elements, so para3 is to specify which 10 elements
users want to get/set.
When para1=4, users can set/get Speech mode para. Also there are 8 groups of Speech mode
para. so para2 is a must and it‘s range is 0~7 to specify which group of Speech mode para to set/get.
11.3.4 Example
▪ <para2> ↓ ↓<para3>
▪ AT+EAPS=0,0,0,0
<op>↑ ↑<para1>
<para2> ↓ ↓<para3>(means user want to get first 10 in the array)
+EAPS: 0,0,0,"327.65257.575.65289.290.3.37.494.65253.1723"
<para1> ↑ <setting> ↑(each setting separated by a dot)
CO
11.3.5 Note
1. This command together with +EADP is designed for MediaTek speech tuning tool. For any
other usage please take care and make sure you know the right way and right command order.
2. This command is available from 11AW1109.

L218 AT DOCUMENT
11.4 AT+EGPIO Set GPIO value
This Command is used to set gpio values to driver.
11.4.1 Format
Execution command : AT+ EGPIO = <type>,<level>

Test command : AT+ EGPIO =? Show if the command is supported
11.4.2 Field
AL
Integer type Device type GPIO_LABELID_0 0
GPIO_LABELID_1 1
GPIO_LABELID_2 2
GPIO_LABELID_3 3
ID NQ
GPIO_LABELID_4 4
TI GPIO_LABELID_5
And so on…
5
The number of GPIO depends on

N F LY
different platform.
EN
integer level Device level on 1
off 0
11.4.3 Response
Test command : OK
Execution command : OK /ERROR
Example:
1.Set the GPIO value with GPIO type GPIO_LABELID_20 , Device level
turn on
at+egpio=20,1
OK
CO
11.4.4 Note
AT+EGPIO is a seldom use AT command. In order to save code size (ROM size) , we default
disable the command in low cost projects (LOW_COST_SUPPORT is defined). If you need this
command, please ask PM to enable this command support ( update L4 library).

L218 AT DOCUMENT
11.5 AT+EADC ADC Channel Indication
When +EADC is enabled, the ADC channel indication is sent as unsolicited result code to
DTE.
11.5.1 Format
Execution command : AT+ EADC = <op>

Test command : AT+ EADC =? Show if the command is supported
11.5.2 Field
AL
Integer op operation On (enable) 1
Off (disable) 0
ID NQ
11.5.3 Response
TI
Test command : + EADC: (0,1)
N F LY
EN
11.5.4 Unsolicited result code
+EADC: <ADC0 >,< ADC1 >,< ADC2 >,< ADC3>,< ADC4 >
Description: This is indication report the battery status to AP.
Type Long name Parameter/comment
integer ADC value ADC0 Battery voltage (microvoltage)
ADC1 Battery temperature ( 1/100 C)
ADC2 AUX voltage (microvoltage)
ADC3 Charge current (micro A)
ADC4 Charger voltage (microvoltage)
CO
11.5.5 Note
AT+EADC is a seldom use AT command. In order to save code size (ROM size) , we default

L218 AT DOCUMENT
11.6 AT+EPWM PWM Testing
This Command is used for engineering mode.

PWM frequency and duty cycle test parameters setting and start/stop operation.
11.6.1 Format
Execution command : AT+ EPWM = <op>,<type>,[<level>],[<freq>,<duty>]

[ AT+EPWM = 0, <type>,<level> ]
[ AT+EPWM = 1, <type>,<level>,<freq>,<duty> ]
[ AT+EPWM = 2, <type>,<freq>,<duty> ]
[ AT+EPWM = 3, <type> ]
AL
Test command : AT+ EPWM =? Show if the command is supported
11.6.2 Field
ID NQ
Type Short name
TI Long name Parameter/comment
integer op operation Get level value 0
Set level value 1
Start Test 2
N F LY
Stop Test 3
EN
Integer type PWM1 0
PWM2 1
Alter 2
Integer level level 0-4
integer freq frequency in unit of Hz
Integer duty duty cycle percentage
Note: PWM type is project-dependent.
Such as LCM backlight, Keypad backlight, and Flashlight LED.
11.6.3 Response
Test command : + EPWM: <item idx>

CO
Example1:
(in this example, PWM1 presents keypad backlight, PWM2 presents LCD
backlight)
at+epwm=2,0,5,5 (keypad backlight is blinking)
OK
at+epwm=3,0 (keypad backlight stops blinking)
OK
at+epwm=2,1,3,4 (LCD is blinking)

L218 AT DOCUMENT
OK
at+epwm=3,1 (LCD stops blinking)
OK
Example2:
1.Start PWM2 testing with frequency=4, duty=6
at+epwm=2,1,4,6
OK
2.Stop PWM2 Testing.
at+epwm=3,1
OK
11.6.4 Note
AL
AT+EGWM is a seldom use AT command. In order to save code size (ROM size) , we default
ID NQ
11.7 AT+ESAM
TI Set Audio Mode
This Command is used to set audio mode. We have three audio mode , normal, loud speaker
N F LY
and handset.
EN
11.7.1 Format
Execution command : AT+ ESAM = <mode>

Test command : AT+ ESAM =? Show if the command is supported
11.7.2 Field

Integer mode Audio mode normal 0
handset 1
loudspeaker 2
CO
11.7.3 Response
Test command : + ESAM: (0-2)


L218 AT DOCUMENT
11.8 AT+ESLT Set Audio Gain Value
This Command is used to set audio sound gain value.
11.8.1 Format
Execution command : AT+ ESLT= <type>,<gain>

Test command : AT+ ESLT =? Show if the command is supported
11.8.2 Field
AL
Integer type Audio type call tone 0
keypad tone 1
microphone 2
<reserved> 3
ID NQ
speech sound 4
TI side tone
MP3, Wave, melody,
5
6
Imelody,midi
N F LY
Integer Gain Gain value 0~255

EN
11.8.3 Response
Test command : + ESLT: (0-6),(0-255)

Example:
1. set speech sound gain value 150.
AT+ESLT = 4, 150
OK
11.8.4 Note
CO
AT+ESLT is a seldom use AT command. In order to save code size (ROM size) , we default
11.9 AT+EGMR Mobile Revision and IMEI
This command is used to get mobile revision and IMEI for Engineer mode and factory test

L218 AT DOCUMENT
using.
The set operation only apply for IMEI, Serial Number and SV.
Setting new IMEI needs to reboot the target, then IMEI can take effect.
11.9.1 Format
Execution command : AT+ EGMR = <op>,<type>[,str]

Test command : AT+ EGMR =? Show if the command is supported
11.9.2 Field

Integer op operation get 0
AL
Set 1
integer type Revision type Baseband chipset (only for op= 0) 0
DSP code (only for op= 0) 1
ID NQ
DSP patch (only for op= 0) 2
TI MCU software (only for op= 0)
MS board(hardware) (only for op= 0)
Serial Number
3
4
5
Melody revision (only for op=0) 6
N F LY
SIM1 IMEI 7
EN
MMI resource ver. (only for op=0) 8
SV (Software Version in IMEISV: 2 9
digit
SIM2 IMEI 10
SIM3 IMEI 11
SIM4 IMEI 12
string Str Input/output
string
11.9.3 Response
Test command : + EGMR: (0,1),(0-9)

CO
Execution command : When type = (1-7, 9):

[+EGMR: "str"]
OK
When type = 8 (+EGMR=0,8 to get MMI resource):
+AUDIO: "ver"
+IMAGE: "ver"
+FONT: "ver"
+STR: "ver"
L218 AT DOCUMENT
OK
11.9.4 Example
3. read IMEI:
AT+EMGR=0,7
+EGMR: "135790246811220"
OK
4. Write IMEI:
AT+EGMR=1,7,"123451234512345"
OK
AT+EGMR=0,7
+EGMR: "123451234512345"
AL
OK
5. read SV of IMEISV
AT+EGMR=0,9
+EGMR: "78"
ID NQ
OK TI
6. Write SV
AT+EGMR=1,9,"01"
OK
AT+EGMR=0,9
N F LY
+EGMR: "01"
EN
OK
11.9.5 Note
<type> = 10, 11, and 12 are only turned on when GEMINI, GEMINI+ with 3 or more SIM, and
GEMINI+ with 4 SIM respectively.
<type>=6 is removed from 0BA.0848MP

<type> = 11 and 12 work from 10AW10.50
11.9.5.2 Usage Note

CO
N/A
11.10 AT+ESIMS Check SIM Status
The read command is only response the SIM inserted status.

L218 AT DOCUMENT
The active command is used to trigger SIM reset procedure and response the SIM inserted
status.
The execute command is used to enable/disable +ESIMS URC report.
11.10.1 Format
Command Possible Response (s)

AT+ESIMS? +ESIMS: <SIM_INSERTED>
OK
AT+ESIMS +ESIMS: <SIM_INSERTED>
OK
AT+ESIMS=<mode> OK
AL
11.10.2 Field
ID NQ
Type Short Name Parameter / Comment
Integer
Integer
ED
mode
TI
SIM_INSERT 0
1
0
No SIM
Detected
Disable +ESIMS URC
1 Enable +ESIMS URC
N F LY
EN
11.10.3 Note


11.11 AT+EDFT GPIO factory testing
This Command is used for GPIO device factory test using. We provide this function for testing
with hardware GPIO device functionality test. You have to specify the GPIO device level if need by
+EPWM command.
CO
11.11.1 Format
Execution command : AT+ EDFT = <device>,<level>

Test command : AT+ EDTF =? Show if the command is supported

L218 AT DOCUMENT
11.11.2 Field

Integer device GPIO Device GPIO_DEV_LED_MAINLCD 0
GPIO_DEV_LED_SUBLCD(reserved) 1
GPIO_DEV_LED_STATUS_1I 2
GPIO_DEV_LED_STATUS_2(G) 3
GPIO_DEV_LED_STATUS_3(B) 4
GPIO_DEV_LED_KEY 5
GPIO_DEV_VIBRATOR 6
GPIO_DEV_FLASHLIGHT 7
GPIO_DEV_RESERVED1 8
AL
ID NQ
TI GPIO_DEV_RESERVED7
GPIO_DEV_RESERVED8
GPIO_DEV_RESERVED9
14
15
16
N F LY
EN
integer level Device Level 0 OFF
level
Level 1-5 1~5
11.11.3 Response
Test command : + EDFT: (0-20),(0,1~5)

OK
CO
11.11.4 Note
AT+EDFT is a seldom use AT command. In order to save code size (ROM size) , we default

L218 AT DOCUMENT
11.12 AT+ESLP Sleep Mode
This Command is used to enable and disable sleep mode in the mobile.
11.12.1 Format
Execution command : AT+ ESLP = <op>

Test command : AT+ ESLP =? Show if the command is supported
11.12.2 Field
AL
Integer op operation enable 1
disable 0
ID NQ
11.12.3 Response
TI
Test command : + ESLP: (0, 1)
N F LY
EN
11.13 AT+EGPO GPO value
This Command is used to set gpo values to driver.
11.13.1 Format
Execution command : AT+ EGPO =<port>,<data>

Test command : AT+ EGPO =? Show if the command is supported
11.13.2 Field

CO
Integer data Data Value 0~254

integer port Device Port 0~254
11.13.3 Response
Test command : + EGPO: (0-254),(0-254)

L218 AT DOCUMENT
OK
11.13.4 Note
AT+EGPO is a seldom use AT command. In order to save code size (ROM size) , we default
11.14 AT+ELNVRM NVRAM write protection
This command is used to lock the operation of NVRAM for write protection.
Only the files with attribute NVRAM_ATTR_WRITEPROTECT will be affected, such as IMEI.
AL
11.14.1 Format
ID NQ
Execution command : AT+ ELNVRM = <op>
TI
Test command : AT+ ELNVRM =? Show if the command is supported
11.14.2 Field
N F LY
EN
Integer op operation Lock 0
disable(reserved)
Lock enable 1
Temp 2
disable(reserved)
Lock OTP 3
11.14.3 Response
Test command : +ELNVRM: (1)

CO
11.15 AT+ACTTEST PDP context activate or deactivate from EM
mode
To activate or deactivate the specified PDP context (s) and get flow control buffer for
+CGSDATA.

L218 AT DOCUMENT
11.15.1 Format

+ACTTEST=<state> ,<cid> OK
ERROR
+ACTTEST=? OK
11.15.2 Field
<state>: indicates the state of PDP context activation

1 – deactivated
2 – activated
AL
ID NQ
TI
11.16 AT+ECPI Call progress information
To enable/disable call progress information

N F LY
EN
11.16.1 Format

+ECPI=<mode>
+ECPI? +ECPI: <mode>
+ECPI=? +ECPI: (0-4294967295)
11.16.2 Field
<mode>: is a 32 bit unsigned integer value . each bit represent the report mode of each event.
i.e. You can enable/disable specific +ECPI event
[NOTE]
CO
+ECPI:<call_id>, <msg_type>, <is_ibt>, <is_tch>, <dir>, <call_mode>, [<number>, <type>],

[<disc_cause>]
integer Call_id Call id for this call
integer msg_type 0 CLCC_MT_CALL
1 CSMCC_DISCONNECT_MSG
2 CSMCC_ALERT_MSG

L218 AT DOCUMENT
3 CSMCC_CALL_PROCESS_MSG
4 CSMCC_SYNC_MSG
5 CSMCC_PROGRESS_MSG
6 CSMCC_CALL_CONNECTED_MSG
129 CSMCC_ALL_CALLS_DISC_MSG
130 CSMCC_CALL_ID_ASSIGN_MSG
131 CSMCC_STATE_CHANGE_HELD
132 CSMCC_STATE_CHANGE_ACTIVE
133 CSMCC_STATE_CHANGE_DISCONNECTED
134 CSMCC_STATE_CHANGE_MO_DISCONNECTING
integer is_ibt 0 No in band tone
1 In band tone assigned
integer is_tch 0 No TCH assigned
AL
1 TCH assigned
integer dir 0 CLCC_MO_CALL
1 CLCC_MT_CALL
integer call_mode 0 CLCC_VOICE_CALL
ID NQ
TI 1 CLCC_DATA_CALL
2 CLCC_FAX_CALL
3 CLCC_VFD_VOICE
4 CLCC_AVD_VOICE
N F LY
5 CLCC_AVF_VOICE
EN
6 CLCC_VFD_DATA
7 CLCC_AVD_DATA
8 CLCC_AVF_FAX
string Number Calling/called number
integer Type 145 International call
129 National call
Integer disc_cause see Design Note

Integer mode CSMCC_SETUP_MSG(MT call) Any value that bit 1 is 1
CSMCC_DISCONNECT_MSG Any value that bit 2 is 1
CSMCC_ALERT_MSG Any value that bit 3 is 1
CSMCC_CALL_PROCESS_MSG Any value that bit 4 is 1
CSMCC_SYNC_MSG Any value that bit 5 is 1
CO
CSMCC_PROGRESS_MSG Any value that bit 6 is 1

CSMCC_CALL_CONNECTED_M Any value that bit 7 is 1
SG
CSMCC_ALL_CALLS_DISC_MSG Any value that bit 8 is 1
CSMCC_CALL_ID_ASSIGN_MSG Any value that bit 9 is 1
CSMCC_STATE_CHANGE_HELD Any value that bit 10 is
1

L218 AT DOCUMENT
CSMCC_STATE_CHANGE_ACTI Any value that bit 11 is

VE 1
CSMCC_STATE_CHANGE_DISC Any value that bit 12 is
ONN 1
ECTED
CSMCC_STATE_CHANGE_MO_ Any value that bit 13 is
DISC 1
ONNECTING
ex: AT+ECPI = 257 .

257 = 0x101 = 0001 0000 0001
so only event 1 (CSMCC_SETUP_MSG) and event 9(CSMCC_CALL_ID_ASSIGN_MSG)
report is enabled.
AL
11.16.3 Design Notes
11.16.3.1 Call Disconnection Cause

ID NQ
TI
1. <disc_cause> is only provided for CSMCC_DISCONNECT_MSG event,which is sent when
modem receive RELEASE or RELEASE COMPLETE CC message from the Network.
2. <disc_cause> is defined in SPEC 24.008 Annex H. ex: CM_USER_BUSY (17) for Call Control
N F LY
cause.
EN
0 Please refer to l3_inc_enums.h (under mcu\ps\interfaces\enum) before HAL
revise.(before 11B.W11.44MP)
1 Please refer to ps_public_enum.h (under mcu\interfaces\modem) after HAL revise
(after 11B.W11.44MP)
3. Call application shall monitor CSMCC_CALL_DISCONNECTED event for all call disconnection
event. That‘s because not every call disconnection event has <disc_cause>,ex: the MO call setup
fail in local ,maybe MM connection setup fail. In such case, there will be no Call Control cause from
Network.
For call application that want to get <disc_cause>, it shall also monitor
CSMCC_DISCONNECT_MSG event to get <disc_cause>. And it‘s guaranteed that
CSMCC_DISCONNECT_MSG (for call_id =x) must come before
CSMCC_CALL_DISCONNECTED( for call_id = x). Thus, call application can keep the <cause> for
call_id = x when receiving CSMCC_DISCONNECT_MSG (for call_id =x) first and use it as the
<disc_cause> when receiving CSMCC_CALL_DISCONNECTED( for call_id = x)
CO
11.17 AT+ERAT RAT mode and GPRS/EDGE status
To get RAT mode status and GRRS/EDGE status or set RAT mode of MS

L218 AT DOCUMENT
11.17.1 Format

+ERAT? +ERAT : <current RAT>, <GPRS status>,<RAT
mode>,<prefer_rat>
+ERAT=<RAT OK /ERROR
mode>[,<prefer_rat>]
11.17.2 Field
+ERAT : <current RAT>, <GPRS status>, <RAT mode>,<prefer_rat>

<current RAT>: RAT of current PLMN
AL
0 GSM
2 UTRAN
3 GSM w/EGPRS
4 UTRAN w/HSDPA
ID NQ
5 UTRAN w/HSUPA TI
255 unknown
<GPRS status>:
N F LY
0:GPRS
EN
1:EDGE
<RAT mode>: RAT mode setting of MS
0: GSM only
1: WCDMA only
2: Auto
255: unknown
<prefer_rat>: prefer rat setting
0: No prefer /* Default value */
2: WCDMA prefer /* Applicable when rat_mode=2 */
11.17.3 Note

CO
The command is available from 09A.0940MP
<prefer_rat> only applicable when feature option WCDMA_PREFER is true and only for UMTS
FDD project. If <prefer_rat> not given, keep the previous prefer setting. AT +ECAL – Calibration

L218 AT DOCUMENT
Data Download Status Check
11.18 AT+ECAL Calibration data download status
This command is used to query the calibration data download status.
11.18.1 Format

+ECAL? +ECAL: <status>
+ECAL OK
+ECAL=? OK
AL
11.18.2 Field
ID NQ
Type Short name
TI Parameter/comment
integer status calibration data is not download 0
calibration data is donwload 1
N F LY
EN
11.18.3 NOTE
This command is supported from 11B.W12.09

CO

L218 AT DOCUMENT
12 STK AT Commands
Please refer to another document Remote_SAT (RSAT). We introduce the STK AT command in
detail in that document.
AL
ID NQ
TI
N F LY
EN
CO

L218 AT DOCUMENT
13 Proprietary AT Commands For PS
13.1 AT+EPBSE Band Selection
To set MS preferred band.
13.1.1 Format
Command Response
+EEBSE=<gsm_band>,
AL
<umts_band>
+EEBSE? +EPBSE: <gsm_band>, <umts_band>
+EEBSE =? List of supported bit masks of each band mode
ID NQ
TI +EPBSE: <gsm_band>, <umts_band>
13.1.2 Field
N F LY
EN
<GSM_band>
bit 1 EGSM900
bit 3 DCS1800
bit 4 PCS1900
bit 7 GSM850
0xff Auto selection 
<UMTS_band>
bit 0 UMTS BAND I : WCDMA-IMT-2000
bit 1 UMTS BAND II : WCDMA-PCS-1900
bit 2 UMTS BAND III : WCDMA-DCS-1800
bit 3 UMTS BAND IV : WCDMA-AWS-1700
bit 4 UMTS BAND V : WCDMA-CLR-850
bit 5 UMTS BAND VI : WCDMA-800
bit 6 UMTS BAND VII : WCDMA-IMT-E-2600
CO
bit 7 UMTS BAND VIII : WCDMA-GSM-900

bit 8 UMTS BAND IX : WCDMA-1800
bit 9 UMTS BAND X : WCDMA-1700
0xffff Auto selection 

L218 AT DOCUMENT
13.1.3 Example
Set Auto band (select all supported bands)

AT+EPBSE=255, 65535
OK
Set “EURO band” (GSM-900 / DCS-1800 / WCDMA-IMT-2000)
AT+EPBSE=10, 1
OK
13.1.4 Note
AL
The command is available from 09A.09B.W0948MP
13.1.4.2 Usage Note

ID NQ
TI
1. This command is not allowed to set each band mode, GSM or UMTS, as 0, said
AT+EPBSE=<gsm_band>,0 or AT+EPBSE=0, <umts_band>.
2. If the band mode is not supported, this command will just ignore the setting
N F LY
3. After using this command, user should reboot the handset to let the setting become effective
EN
if the compile option __DYNAMIC_BAND_SEL__ is not opened
4. If we get 0 in the certain field using AT+EPBSE=? , it means that the field is not supported.
13.2 AT+EGPAU PPP Authentication
This command is used to set GPRS PPP negotiated authentication protocol.
13.2.1 Format
Execution command : AT+ EGPAU = <op>,<cid> [,<is_chap>]

Test command : AT+ EGPAU =? Show the supported value.
13.2.2 Field
CO

Integer op operation Read 0
Write 1
Integer cid Context id Please refer to the value in
test command response.
Integer is_chap Negotiation protocol PAP 0
L218 AT DOCUMENT
CHAP 1
13.2.3 Response
Test command : + EGPAU: (0,1), (<cid range>), (0-1)

13.3 AT+EPIN1 Enter PIN1
This command is used to validate PUK and to define a new PIN code.
AL
13.3.1.1 Format

+EPIN1= <puk>,<new_pin> +CME ERROR: <err>
ID NQ
+EPIN1? TI +EPIN1: <code>
+CME ERROR: <err>
+EPIN1=?
N F LY
EN
13.3.1.2 Field
<puk>, <new_pin>: string type values

READY MT is not pending for any password
SIM PIN MT is waiting SIM PIN to be given
SIM PUK MT is waiting SIM PUK to be given
SIM BLOCKED PIN and PUK are blocked
13.3.1.3 Usage Note
Do not use this command during power on process. During power on process, use
AT+CPIN
CO
to validate PUK.
Since this proprietary command is intended for modem project or dual-SIM/mode project . We
won‘t handle such MMI synchronization problem or perform extra error handling
Only used AT+EPIN1 when SIM card inserted

L218 AT DOCUMENT
13.4 AT+EPIN2 Enter PIN2
This command is used to validate the PIN2 , or to validate PUK2 and to define a new PIN2
code.
13.4.1 Format

+EPIN2=<pin2> +CME ERROR: <err>
or
+EPIN2= <puk2>,<newpin2>
+EPIN2 ? +EPIN2: <code>
AL
+CME ERROR: <err>
+EPIN2=?
ID NQ
13.4.2 Field TI
<pin2>, <newpin2>, <puk2>: string type values
N F LY
READY PIN2 is allowed to verified

EN
SIM PUK2 PIN2 is blocked
SIM BLOCKED PIN2 and PUK2 are blocked
AT+EPIN2? Is ready in 09A.W0940MP
13.4.2.2 Usage Note
To verify PIN2 , suggest to use AT+CPWD="P2","PIN2","PIN2".

To unblock PIN2, use AT+EPIN2="PUK2","new_PIN2"
Only used AT+EPIN2 when SIM card inserted and MT has completely boot up.
CO
13.5 AT+EPINC PIN remaining attempt number
This command queries the number of remaining valid tries for PIN1, PIN2, PUK1, and PUK2
13.5.1 Format

L218 AT DOCUMENT
+EPINC +EPINC: <pin1>,<pin2>,<puk1>,<puk2>

+CME ERROR: <err>
+EPINC ? +EPINC: <pin1>,<pin2>,<puk1>,<puk2>
+CME ERROR: <err>
+EPINC=?
13.5.2 Field
<pin1>, <pin2>,<puk1>,<puk2> are the remaining tries of each type.
13.6 AT+ESMSS SMS status change mode
AL
SMS status change mode after +CMGR and +CMGL
13.6.1 Format
ID NQ
Command
+ESMSS= <mode>
+CME ERROR: <err>
+ESMSS ? +ESMSS : <mode>
N F LY
+ESMSS=? +ESMSS : (0-1)

EN
13.6.2 Field
<mode>
0 Unchange – SMS status remains as "REC UNREAD" after +CMGR or +CMGL
1 Change – SMS status changes from "REC UNREAD" to "REC READ" after +CMGR
or +CMGL.
13.6.3 Note

CO
N/A
13.7 AT+EOPN Read Operator name
This command returns the operator name in alphanumeric format when given the numeric
format.

L218 AT DOCUMENT
13.7.1 Format

+EOPN= +EOPN: <format>, <oper_alpha>
<format>,<oper_num> +CME ERROR: <err>
+EOPN=? +CME ERROR: <err>
13.7.2 Field
<format> : 0 long alphanumeric format

19 short alphanumeric format
<oper_num>: the operator in numeric format
AL
<oper_alpha>: the operator in alphanumeric format
[NOTE] We DO NOT support full set of alphanumeric format of <oper>, since the code
size will become very large. If the customer needs the alphanumeric format,
ID NQ
the table can be customized in
TI
mcu\custom\ps\xxx_bb\customer_operator_names.c.
13.8 AT+CGSDATA Sending uplink data

N F LY
EN
This command is used to send uplink data to network.
13.8.1 Format

+CGSDATA= +CME ERROR: <err>
<byte>
13.8.2 Field
<byte> the number of byte sending to network

example:
CO
at+cgsdata = 500 (sending 500 bytes)
13.9 AT +EQUERY General query command
To query hardware or MS status.

L218 AT DOCUMENT
13.9.1 Format

+EQUERY=<op> OK
ERROR
+EQUERY=? OK
13.9.2 Field
integer op 0 Query SMS stats to write SMS to
AL
inbox
1 Query charger status
2 Query clam status
ID NQ
TI 3
4
Query if sms ready
Query if phb ready

N F LY
5 Query if open compile option

EN
__SMS_STORAGE_BY_MMI__ and
__GEMINI__ (for phone suite).
6 Query the PHB System module
version.
When defined
__PHB_STORAGE_BY_MMI__, the
version is 2. Else, the version is
1.
7 Query the SMS System module
version.
When defined
__SMS_STORAGE_BY_MMI__, the
version is 2. Else, the version is
CO
1.
[NOTE] We DO NOT 5,6,7 for M2M.
13.9.3 Example
AT+EQUERY=0
+CMGW: (0-3) // SMS support writing SMS to inbox
L218 AT DOCUMENT
OK
AT+EQUERY=1
+CHAR: 1 // charger is plug-in
OK
AT+EQUERY=2
+CLAM: 0 // clam is closed
OK
AT+EQUERY=5
+EQMO: 1 // #if defined(__SMS_STORAGE_BY_MMI__) &&
defined(__GEMINI__)
OK
AT+EQUERY=6
+EPBV: 2 // #if defined(__PHB_STORAGE_BY_MMI__)
OK
AL
AT+EQUERY=7
+ESMSV: 2 // #if defined(__SMS_STORAGE_BY_MMI__)
OK
ID NQ
TI
13.10 AT +EIND Indication Control Command
Set command to enable +EIND unsolicited result code . to indicate the readiness of SMS or
N F LY
PHB or AT
EN
13.10.1 Format

+EIND= <flag> OK
ERROR
+EIND? +EIND: <ind>
+EIND=? +EIND: (0-4294967295)
13.10.2 Field

CO
Integer flag Bit 0 Any value(0~4294967295) that bit

0 is 1 e.g. 1,3,5..
Bit 1 Any value(0~4294967295) that bit
1 is 1 e.g. 2,3,6..
2 is 1 e.g. 4,5,..

L218 AT DOCUMENT
3 is 1 e.g. 8,9..
7 is 1 e.g. 128,129,130..
Integer ind 1 SMS_READY
2 PHB_READY
4 file change for PLMN files
8 file change for EONS files
16 Invalid SIM
128 AT_READY
13.11 AT +ECSQ Received signal level indication
AL
Set command to enable +ECSQ unsolicited result code . to indicate the received signal level.
13.11.1 Format
ID NQ
Command
+ECSQ= <flag>
TI Possible Response(s)
OK
ERROR
+ECSQ? +ECSQ: <flag>
N F LY
EN
+ECSQ=? +ECSQ: (0,1)
Unsolicited result code format: +ECSQ: <rssi>,

<ber>,<rssi_in_qdbm>[,<RSCP_in_qdbm>,<EcN0_in_qdbn>]
13.11.2 Field

Integer flag 0 Received signal level indication
disable
1 Received signal level indication
enable
2 Received signal level indication
Enable(for UMTS)
CO
Integer rssi 0-255 Received signal strength

indication
Integer ber 0-255 Bit error rate
Integer RSCP RSCP In qdbm
EcN0 EcN0 In qdbm

L218 AT DOCUMENT
13.12 AT +EINFO URC Information Control Command
Set command to enable some proprietary unsolicited result code(URC) information report.
13.12.1 Format

+EINFO= <flag> OK
ERROR
+EINFO? +EINFO: <flag>
+EINFO=? +EINFO: (0-4294967295)
AL
13.12.2 Field

ID NQ
Integer flag
TI Bit 0
Bit 1
Any value(0~4294967295) that bit
0 is 1 e.g. 1,3,5..
Any value(0~4294967295) that bit
1 is 1 e.g. 2,3,6..
N F LY

EN
2 is 1 e.g. 4,5,..
3 is 1 e.g. 8,9..
7 is 1 e.g. 128,129,130..
Currently , bit 0 is for +ESMLA (see 15.14 for detail) , bit 1 is for +ECFU (see 15.15 for detail) , bit 4
is for +ESPEECH (see 15.16 for detail)
13.13 AT+ECUSD Proprietary unstructured supplementary
service data
CO
This command allows users to input SS string.
13.13.1 Format

+ECUSD=<m>,<n>[,<str>[,<dcs>]]] +CME ERROR: <err>

L218 AT DOCUMENT
13.13.2 Field
<m>:
1 Execute SS
2 Execute USSD
<m>=2 is specifically used to reply USSD Request from remote and cancel USSD session.
Otherwise, we don‘t distinguish <m>.
<n>:
1 Excute SS/USSD
2 Cancel USSD session (only allowed when <m>=2)
<str>: string type USSD string
<dcs>: 3GPP TS 23.038 [25] Cell Broadcast Data Coding Scheme in integer format (default 0).
This parameter is supposed to be 0x0f. To support other coding scheme needs to turn on
AL
specific compile option.
13.13.3 Note
ID NQ
TI
This command is responded before actually receiving the execution result from the network. It is
responded after FDN checked by PHB to prevent user waiting for a long duration of network
response time.
This command is only supported in modem load and when the command compile option is turn
N F LY
on.
EN
13.14 AT+ERFTX Proprietary control RF transmitter power
This command allows users to perform RF test or control TX power
13.14.1 Format

+ERFTX=<op>,[...] +CME ERROR: <err>
OK
13.14.2 Field
CO

AT+ERFTX=0,<para1>,<para2>,<para3>,<para4>
– <para1>: integer type
• 0: request UE WCDMA TX output power for possible next desired TX signal
measurement (with <para2/3/4>)
• 1: to stop WCDMA TX power output (without any other parameters)
L218 AT DOCUMENT
– <para2>: integer type, indicate ‗band‘, acceptable range is 1~10

• Except 7
• MT6268 solution supports band 1/2/4/5/6/8
– <para3>: integer type, indicate ‗channel (TX frequency)‘, unit is UL UARFCN number
– <para4>: integer type, indicate ‗power level‘, acceptable range: +24 ~ -55, unit is dBm

AT+ERFTX=1,<para1>,<para2>
• <para1>: integer type, 2G L1 reduction level (unit: 1/8 dB)
– 0 ~ 255 (0 dB ~ 32 dB)
• <para2>: integer type, 3G L1 reduction level (unit: 1/8 dB)
– 0 ~ 255 (0 dB ~ 32 dB)

AT+ERFTX=2,<type>,[<parameter1>,<parameter2>,…]

AL
- No parameter

- parameters:
ID NQ
<arfcn>:
PGSM900: 1..124
TI
EGSM900: 0..124, 975..1023
RGSM900: 0..124, 955..1023
DCS1800: 512..885
N F LY
PCS1900: 512..810
EN
GSM450: 259..293
GSM480: 306..340
GSM850: 128..251
<afc>: 0..8191
<band>:
L1_PGSM900 0x01
L1_EGSM900 0x02
L1_RGSM900 0x04
L1_DCS1800 0x08
L1_PCS1900 0x10
L1_GSM450 0x20
L1_GSM480 0x40
L1_GSM850 0x80
(Actually permitted bands are configured by BAND_SUPPORT in make
CO
file)
<tsc>: BSIC (int8), also for TSC = BSIC&0x7 (0~7)
<pcl>: /* support maximum 4 slot PCL*/
GSM400, GSM850, GSM900: 5~19
DCS1800, PCS1900: 0~15
<pattern>:
RFTOOL_NB_TX_RANDOM_WITH_TSC = 0

L218 AT DOCUMENT
RFTOOL_NB_TX_ALL_ONES_WITHOUT_TSC = 1
RFTOOL_AB_TX_RANDOM_WITH_SYNC_SEQ = 2
RFTOOL_CONT_TX_ALL_ZEROS = 3
RFTOOL_CONT_TX_ALL_ONES = 4
RFTOOL_CONT_TX_ALTERNATE_BITS = 5
RFTOOL_CONT_TX_PSEUDO_RANDOM = 6
RFTOOL_MULTISLOT_TX_RANDOM_WITH_TSC = 7
<timeslotmask>:
1 : T_ _ _(0001)
2 : _ T_ _(0010)
3 : T T_ _(0011)
4 : _ _ T_(0100)
5 : T _ T_(0101)
6 : _ T T_(0110)
AL
……..
15 :T T T T (1111)
<cs>: slot coding type
ID NQ
0 : CodingSchemeNone;
TI
1 : CodingSchemeCS1;
N F LY
5 : CodingSchemeMCS0; (used for EDGE)

EN
<isEgprs>:
0 : GSM;
1 : EDGE;

- parameters:
CO
<arfcn>: refer to TX section

<gain>: different in each chip. Usually: -160~320 (unit: 1/8 dB)
<band>: refer to TX section
<pattern>:
RFTOOL_NB_RX_CONTINUE = 0
RFTOOL_NB_RX_BURST = 1


L218 AT DOCUMENT
- parameters:
<band>: refer to TX section
<arfcn_in>: refer to TX section

13.15 AT+EBOOT Boot up mode
This command is used to set the boot up mode for modem. If boot up in exception mode,
modem will perform silent boot up, such as bypass PIN check when it has been verified before.
13.15.1.1 Format
AL
+EBOOT=<mode> OK/ERROR
ID NQ
13.15.1.2 Field
TI
<mode>
0 Normal boot up
1 Exceptoon boot up
N F LY
EN
13.15.1.3 Note







13.16 AT+ICCID Read ICCID of SIM Card

CO
This command is used to read SIM card ICCID if SIM inserted. If SIM not inserted, return
+CME ERROR: 10
13.16.1.1 Format

+ICCID <iccid>

L218 AT DOCUMENT
OK
ERROR / +CME ERROR: 10
13.16.1.2 Field
<iccid>: string type
13.16.1.3 Note


AL
13.17 AT+EPCT PS Conformance Test Mode
For the following cases that our handset behavior needs to be adjusted to meet test
ID NQ
requirement of CTA/FTA/IOT
TI
▪ CTA/FTA/IOT lab equipment is not capable with Spec
▪ Our handset make some changes for real network for better performance or some other reason.
▪ In one kind of test, CTA for example, there maybe two cases that need exclusive behavior of
handset. Just like case A need handset send some signal to network, But Case B actual need
N F LY
EN
handset do not send those signal to network.
13.17.1.1 Format

+EPCT=? +EPCT: <list of supported mode>
OK
+EPCT? +EPCT: <mode>,<profile >
OK
+EPCT=<mode>[,<profile>] OK
13.17.1.2 Field
CO
<mode>: integer type.

Availabe test mode defined in ps_em_enum.h.
typedef enum
{
PS_CONF_TEST_NONE,
PS_CONF_TEST_CTA,
PS_CONF_TEST_FTA,
L218 AT DOCUMENT
PS_CONF_TEST_IOT,
PS_CONF_TEST_OPERATOR,
PS_CONF_TEST_FACTORY,
PS_CONF_TEST_END
} ps_conf_test_mode_enum;
<profile>: integer type. Specific test profile under the <mode>
Availabe test profile defined in ps_em_enum.h. Following is the subset of available test
profile.
/* CTA Items */
#define CTA_INTEGRITY_CHECK_BIT_FOR_MM 0x00000001
#define CTA_TL1_BIT_FOR_TL1 0x00000002
#define CTA_K1297_BIT_FOR_RRCE 0x00000004
#define CTA_SNCONFLICT_BIT_FOR_RLC_RRCE 0x00000008
#define CTA_CFQUERY_BIT_FOR_SS 0x00000010
AL
#define CTA_PLMN_LOCK_BIT_FOR_CSCE 0x00000020
#define CTA_OPEN_MEAS_BIT_FOR_CSCE 0x00000040
#define CTA_DISABLE_DPA_BIT_FOR_RRCE 0x00000080
ID NQ
#define CTA_OPEN_INVALID_INTRA_CELL_REPORT__BIT_FOR_MEME 0x00000100
TI
#define CTA_AUTO_ADJUST_BIT_FOR_RRCE 0x00000200
#define CTA_DISABLE_UPA_BIT_FOR_RRCE 0x00000400
#define CTA_RELEASE_ADAPTION_BIT_FOR_RRCE 0x00000800
/* FTA Items */
N F LY
#define FTA_TEST_ANITE 0x00000001

EN
#define FTA_TEST_CRTUG 0x00000002
#define FTA_TEST_CRTUW 0x00000004
#define FTA_TEST_ANRITSU 0x00000008
#define FTA_TEST_CMW500 0x00000010
13.17.1.3 Note

- Set handset to CTA mode without special setting 
- Set handset to CTA mode with special setting bits(bit 123 on) 

13.18 AT+ECHUP Force release specific call by call_id

CO
This command is used to force release specific call by call_id. If disconnect call can not be
complete in time, it is allowed to use this command to force release the call.
13.18.1 Format

L218 AT DOCUMENT
+ECHUP=<call_id> OK
+CME ERROR: <err>
13.18.2 Field
<call_id>: integer
13.18.3 Note
- Note that it required to disconnect call by AT+CHLD before using AT+ECHUP, MODEM does not
allow disconnect call by AT+ECHUP only.
AL
13.18.4 Change History
The command is available from MAUI.W11.25

ID NQ
TI
N F LY
EN
CO

L218 AT DOCUMENT
14 Proprietary Unsolicited Result code
14.1 URC: +ECSQ
This URC is to report signal strength
14.1.1 Format

+ECSQ:
AL
<rssi>,<ber>,<rssi_in_qdbm>[,<RSCP_in_qdbm>,<EcN0_in_qdbm>]
ID NQ
14.1.2 Field TI
Integer rssi 0-255 Received signal strength
N F LY
indication level
EN
Integer ber 0-255 Bit error rate
Integer rssi_in_qdbm Received signal strength in
quarter dbm
Intger RSCP_in_qdbm RSCP in quarter dbm.
Only avaliabe when camp on UMTS
network
Integer EcN0_in_qdbm EcN0 in quarter dbm.
Only avaliabe when camp on UMTS
network
14.2 URC: +ESMLA

CO
This URC is to report if Auto personalization(defined in 3GPP TS 22.022) is enabled.
14.2.1 Format

+ESMLA: <is_autolock_enabled>, <autolock_result>

L218 AT DOCUMENT
14.2.2 Field

Integer is_autolock_enabled 0 autolock is disabled
1 autolock is enabled
Integer autolock_result 0 autolock is failed
1 autolock is successful
14.2.3 Note
Available after W08.45.
AL
14.3 URC: +ECFU
This URC is intended to notify application to show CFU(Call Forwarding Uncondictional) icon.
ID NQ
14.3.1 Format
TI
N F LY
+ECFU: <status>,<line>
EN
14.3.2 Field

Integer status 0 hide CFU icon
1 show CFU icon
Integer line 1 Line1
2 Line2
14.3.3 Note
CO
Available after W09.04 . And it‘s only supported in modem load .
14.4 URC: +ESPEECH
This URC is to notify application to attach the speech for voice call (user connection). It‘s
defined in spec 24.008 section5 call control .

L218 AT DOCUMENT
14.4.1 Format

+ESPEECH: <on_off>,<rat>,<irho_speech_on_off>
14.4.2 Field

Integer on_off 0 Detach speech
1 Attach speech
Integer Rat 1 GSM
AL
2 UMTS
3 GSM
Integer irho_speech_on_off 0 Not inter-rat handover
1 Is inter-rat handover
ID NQ
14.4.3 Note
TI
N F LY
Available after W09.12 . And it‘s only supported in modem load .

EN
14.5 URC: +ESCRI
This URC is to notify application the result of AT+ESCRI
14.5.1 Format

+ESCRI: <report_value>
14.5.2 Field
CO
<report_value>: integer
SCRI_REQ_SENT = 0,
SCRI_CS_SESSION_ONGOING = 1,
SCRI_PS_SIGNALLING_ONGOING = 2,
SCRI_NO_PS_DATA_SESSION = 3,
SCRI_REQ_NOT_SENT = 4,
SCRI_NOT_ALLOWED = 5

L218 AT DOCUMENT
14.5.3 Note
14.6 URC: +ESIMS
Indicate the SIM is inserted or not and related cause
14.6.1 Format
+ESIMS: <sim_inserted_status>,<cause >
14.6.2 Field
AL
<sim_inserted_status>: integer
0 SIM not presented
1 SIM presented
ID NQ
<cause>: integer
TI
0 SIM_CARD_REMOVED,
1 SIM_ACCESS_ERROR,
2 // Reserved for other use
N F LY

EN
5 SIM_ACCESS_PROFILE_ON
6 SIM_ACCESS_PROFILE_OFF
7 DUALSIM_DISCONNECTED
8 DUALSIM_CONNECTED
9 SIM_VSIM_ON
10 SIM_VSIM_OFF
11 SIM_PLUG_OUT
12 SIM_PLUG_IN
13 SIM_RECOVERY_START
14 SIM_RECOVERY_END
14.6.3 Note
CO

14.7 URC: +EUSIM
Indicate the inserted SIM card is SIM or USIM.

The URC is control by AT+EIND command(The 6th bit).

L218 AT DOCUMENT
14.7.1 Format
+EUSIM: <type>
14.7.2 Field
Type Name Parameter / Comment

Integer type 0 SIM
1 USIM
14.7.3 Note
AL

14.8 URC: +ETESTSIM

ID NQ
TI
This URC reports whether current inserted SIM is test SIM during power-on procedure.
There is no query mode for this command.
This URC is supported from W12.23.
N F LY
EN
14.8.1 Format

+ETESTSIM: <is_test_sim>
16.8.3 Field
Integer is_test_sim 0 normal sim
1 test sim
CO

L218 AT DOCUMENT
15 SSL/TLS AT Command
15.1 AT+ECERT Install / retrieve certificate for SSL/TLS
Install or retrieve certificate for SSL/TLS
15.1.1 Format Command

+ECERT=<op>[,<path>[,<passw OK/ERROR
AL
d>]]
ID NQ
15.1.2 Field TI
<op>:
0: install
1: retrieve private key
N F LY
EN
2: query certificate status
<path>:
Certificate file path which will be installed.
<passwd>:
passwd for certificate installing.
OK means the operation complete and success
ERROR means the operation uncompleted or completed but failed.
15.1.3 Note
Example:
AT+ECERT=0, "z://abc.c", "123" /*install certificate z://abc.c with passwd 123*/
OK
AT+ECERT=1, "z://abc.c" /*retrieve certificate to z://abc.c */
CO
OK
AT+ECERT=2 /*query last certificate state*/
ERROR //the certificate not found

L218 AT DOCUMENT
16 GPS AT COMMAND
Overview of GPS AT Commands:
AT Command Description
AT+EGPSC Power on/off GPS
AT+EGPSS Send PMTK Command
AT+EGPSEPO Set EPO Parameter
AT+ EGPSTS Set GPS Time Sync Parameter
AL
The following GPS related Commands related to Firmware version(for L218)
AT+CUSGPSC Power on/off GPS

AT+CUSGPSS Send PMTK Command
ID NQ
AT+ CUSGPSEPO TI Set EPO Parameter
AT+ CUSGPSG get GPS power on/off status
N F LY
16.1 AT+EGPSC Power on/off GPS

EN
Control GPS state -- power on/off GPS reciever.
16.1.1 Format

+EGPSC=<state> OK
+CME ERROR: <err>
+EGPSC? Not Support
+EGPSC=? Not Support
CO
16.1.2 Field
<state>:
0: power off GPS
1: power on GPS

L218 AT DOCUMENT
16.1.3 Note
Example:
AT+EGPSC=1 // Power on GPS
OK // response from AT
AT+EGPSC=0 // Power off GPS
16.2 AT+EGPSS Send PMTK Command
Send MTK private GPS command – PMTK command to GPS chip.
AL
16.2.1 Format

+EGPSS=”<pmtk>” OK
ID NQ
TI +CME ERROR: <err>
+EGPSS? Not Support
+EGPSS=? Not Support
N F LY
EN
16.2.2 Field
< pmtk >:

PMTK command string. No ‗$‘ before the PMTK string.
16.2.3 Note
This Command can be set after GPS power on success, or will return error.
Only support with all in one GPS chip.
Example:
AT+EGPSS="PMTK000*32" // Test Message
OK //response by AT
AT+EGPSS=" PMTK353,1,0,0,0,0*2A" // Configure GNSS Type as GPS only
CO
OK //response by AT
16.3 AT+EGPSEPO Set EPO Parameter
Enable/Disable EPO downloading and aiding features. Set the data account used by EPO
downloading.

L218 AT DOCUMENT
16.3.1 Format

+EGPSEPO=<status>,<data account> OK
+CME ERROR: <err>
+EGPSEPO? Not Support
+EGPSEPO=? Not Support
16.3.2 Field
< Status >:

0: Enable EPO
AL
1: Disable EPO
< Data account >:
Network data account is used to access internet and set by command "AT+EGDCONT".
ID NQ
Please refer the detail about "AT+EGDCONT" on chapter 18.1.
TI
16.3.3 Note
Precondition for using EPO feature:

N F LY
EN
First, set property data account which will be used by EPO.
AT+EGDCONT=0,"IP","cmnet"
Second, activate the network on the device.
AT+ETCPIP=1,0
16.4 AT+EGPSTS Set GPS Time Sync Parameter
Enable/Disable GPS time sync and aiding. Set time sync network data account.
16.4.1 Format

+ EGPSTS=<status>,<data account> OK
CO
+CME ERROR: <err>

+ EGPSTS? Not Support
+ EGPSTS=? Not Support

L218 AT DOCUMENT
16.4.2 Field
< Status >:

0: Enable GPS time sync
1: Disable GPS time sync
< Data account >:
16.4.3 Note
Precondition for using time sync feature:

First, set property data account which will be used by time sync.
AL
AT+ETCPIP=1,0
ID NQ
TI
16.5 AT+CUSGPSC Power on/off GPS
N F LY
Control GPS state -- power on/off GPS reciever. GPS_UART NMEA output only.
EN
16.5.1 Format

+CUSGPSC=<state> OK
+CME ERROR: <err>
+CUSGPSC? Not Support
+CUSGPSC=? Not Support
16.5.2 Field
<state>:
CO
0: power off GPS

1: power on GPS
16.5.3 Note
Example:
AT+CUSGPSC=1 // Power on GPS

L218 AT DOCUMENT
AT+CUSGPSC=0 // Power off GPS
16.6 AT+CUSGPSS Send PMTK Command
Send MTK private GPS command – PMTK command to GPS chip.
16.6.1 Format

+CUSGPSS=”<pmtk>” OK
+CME ERROR: <err>
AL
+CUSGPSS? Not Support
+CUSGPSS=? Not Support
ID NQ
16.6.2 Field
< pmtk >:

TI
PMTK command string. No ‗$‘ before the PMTK string.
N F LY
EN
16.6.3 Note
This Command can be set after GPS power on success, or will return error.
Only support with all in one GPS chip.
Example:
AT+CUSGPSS="PMTK000*32" // Test Message
OK //response by AT
AT+CUSGPSS=" PMTK353,1,0,0,0,0*2A" // Configure GNSS Type as GPS only
OK //response by AT
16.7 AT+CUSGPSEPO Set EPO Parameter

CO
Enable/Disable EPO downloading and aiding features. Set the data account used by EPO
downloading.
16.7.1 Format

+CUSGPSEPO=<status>,<data account> OK

L218 AT DOCUMENT
+CME ERROR: <err>

+CUSGPSEPO? Not Support
+CUSGPSEPO=? Not Support
16.7.2 Field
< Status >:

0: Enable EPO
1: Disable EPO
< Data account >:
AL
16.7.3 Note
ID NQ
Precondition for using EPO feature:
TI
First, set property data account which will be used by EPO.
AT+ETCPIP=1,0
N F LY
EN
16.8 AT+CUSGPSG Get GPS status
Get GPS power on off status.
16.8.1 Format

+ CUSGPSG=<status>,<data account> OK
+CME ERROR: <err>
+ CUSGPSG? Not Support
+ CUSGPSG=? Not Support
CO
16.8.2 Field
< Status >:

0: Enable GPS time sync
1: Disable GPS time sync
< Data account >:
L218 AT DOCUMENT
16.8.3 Note
Precondition for using time sync feature:

First, set property data account which will be used by time sync.
AT+ETCPIP=1,0
AL
ID NQ
TI
N F LY
EN
CO

L218 AT DOCUMENT
17 BT Connection Manager AT Command
17.1 AT+EBTPWR Power on/off BT
The command is used to power on or off BT. The power on command could only be sent
when BT is power off. And the power off command could only be sent when BT is power on.
17.1.1 Format
AL
+EBTPWR=? +EBTPWR: （0-1）/ERROR
+EBTPWR=<op> OK /ERROR
ID NQ
17.1.2 Field
<op>: integer
TI
0 power on
N F LY
EN
1 power off
Example
AT+EBTPWR=0//power on bt
OK
17.2 AT+EBTNAME Read/Write BT device local name
The command is used to read or write BT device local name. The max invalid length of the
device name is 54.
17.2.1 Format
Command Possible response(s) Description

CO
+EBTNAME=? OK/ERROR Show if the command is supported

+EBTNAME? +EBTNAME:<device name> Read BT local name
OK /ERROR
+EBTNAME=<device name> OK / ERROR Write BT local name

L218 AT DOCUMENT
17.2.2 Field
< device name >: BT name string ,no need use " " double quotes.
Example
AT+EBTNAME?//Read BT local name
+EBTNAME：mydevice
OK
AT+EBTNAME=mydevice1 // write BT local name
OK
17.3 AT+EBTADDR Read/Write BT device local address
AL
The command is used to read or write BT device local address. This CMD should only sent to
Target when BT is power off.
17.3.1 Format
ID NQ
Command
+EBTADDR=?
OK/ERROR
Description
Show if the command is supported
+EBTADDR? +EBTADDR:<address > Read BT address
N F LY
OK /ERROR
EN
+EBTADDR=<address> OK / ERROR Write BT address
17.3.2 Field
<address>: BT addr string ,no need use " " double quotes ，length should be 12 charators
Example：
1234565b0102
It means ：LAP is 0x123456, UAP is 0x5b, NAP is 0x0102
Example
AT+EBTADDR?//Read BT local addr
+EBTADDR：1234565b0102
OK
AT+EBTADDR=1234565b0102 // write BT local addr
CO
OK
17.4 AT+EBTINQ Inquiry BT devices
The command is used to inquiry BT devices.

L218 AT DOCUMENT
17.4.1 Format

+EBTINQ=? +EBTINQ：（0-255 ）， Show if the command is supported
（ 0-255 ）（ 0-255 ）（ 0-
4294967295）OK/ERROR
+EBTINQ? +EBTADDR: <interval>, Get inquiry parameters
<polltime>,<device
number>,<Cod>
OK /ERROR
+EBTINQ=<interval>, OK / ERROR Set inquiry parameters
<polltime>,<device
number>,<Cod>
AL
+EBTINQ OK/ERROR Start to inquiry
ID NQ
17.4.2 Field
TI
<interval >: integer , should greater than poll time. （Note ：Current the parameter does not
work ，because of BT stack already have itself timer ）
<polltime>: integer , the max seconds number for inquring.
N F LY
<device number>: integer

EN
<Cod>: integer (ref: https://www.bluetooth.org/en-us/specification/assignednumbers/
baseband）
Example
AT+EBTINQ=60,10,5,16720412 // Cod: 16720412 = 0xFF221C means Major Service
Class ALL & Major Device Class Phone ALL
OK
AT+EBTINQ?
+EBTINQ:60,10,5, 16720412
OK
AT+EBTINQ
OK
+EBTINQ:1234565b0101 ,devicename1
CO
17.5 AT+EBTINQC Cancel inquiry BT devices
The command is used to cancel inquiry BT devices. Should be sent only when it‘s inquring.

L218 AT DOCUMENT
17.5.1 Format

+EBTINQC=? OK/ERROR Show if the command is supported
+EBTINQC OK /ERROR cancel inquiry BT devices
17.5.2 Field
Example
AT+EBTINQC // cancel inquiry BT devices
OK
AL
17.6 AT+EBTVISB Set BT visiable
The command is used to set BT visiable .

ID NQ
17.6.1 Format
TI
N F LY
+EBTVISB=? +EBTVISB ：（ 0-1 ） ,(0- Show if the command is supported

EN
255)
OK/ERROR
+EBTVISB=<n>,[<time>] OK / ERROR Set BT visiable
17.6.2 Field
<n>: integer
0 unvisiable
1 visiable
<times>:integer , visiable time ,seconds (0~255)
0 visiable forever
1~255 visiable time seconds
CO
Example
AT+EBTVISB=0//unvisiable
OK
AT+EBTVISB=1,0 // visiable forever
OK
AT+EBTVISB=1,60 //visable 60s
OK
AT+EBTNAME=1234565b0102 // write BT local addr
L218 AT DOCUMENT
OK
17.7 AT+EBTRNAME Read remote BT device name
The command is used to read remote BT device name.
17.7.1 Format

+EBTRNAME=? OK/ERROR Show if the command is
supported
+EBTRNAME=<address> +EBTRNAME:<devicenmae > remote BT device name
OK /ERROR
AL
17.7.2 Field
ID NQ
TI
< device name >: BT name string ,no need use " " double quotes.
Example：
N F LY
1234565b0102
EN
Example
AT+EBTRNAME=1234565B0102 //Read remote BT device name
+EBTRNAME：Yourdevidename1
OK
17.8 AT+EBTPAIR PAIR BT device
The command is used to pair BT device.
17.8.1 Format

CO
+EBTPAIR=? +EBTPAIR: ,(0-255) Show if the command is supported

OK/ERROR
+EBTPAIR=<address> ， +EBTPAIR:<address>,<nam pair BT device
<timeout> e>,<enable
16digitspin>[,<password
>]
OK / ERROR

L218 AT DOCUMENT
17.8.2 Field
Example：
1234565b0102
<timeout>: integer , time in seconds for pairing timeout.
The value should between 1 and 20. 0 means 20s. Value larger than 20 will be treat as 20.
<name>：BT name string ,no need use " " double quotes.
< enable 16digitspin>: integer
0 not enable the 16digits pin
1 enable the 16 digits pin
<password>:String
AL
Example
AT+EBTPAIR=1234565b0102,60 //pair device ,and timeout is 60s
+EBTPAIR：1234565b0102,devicename,0,123456
OK
ID NQ
TI
17.9 AT+EBTPAIRCNF Allow or disallow BT pair
The command is used to allow or disallow BT pair.

N F LY
EN
17.9.1 Format

+EBTPAIRCNF=? +EBTPAIRCNF: (0-1), Show if the command is supported
OK/ERROR
+EBTPAIRCNF=<n>[,<password OK / ERROR allow or disallow BT pair
>]
17.9.2 Field
<n>: integer
0 disallow BT pair
CO
1 allow BT pair
<password>: string ，need use " " double quotes
Example
AT+EBTPAIRCNF=1,”123456” // allow pair and password is 123456
OK

L218 AT DOCUMENT
17.10 AT+EBTRP Read remote BT device support profiles
The command is used to read remote BT device support profiles which we support also.
17.10.1 Format

+EBTRP=? OK/ERROR Show if the command is supported
+EBTRP=<address> +EBTRP:<profile_bitmap> read remote BT device support
OK / ERROR profiles
AL
17.10.2 Field
Example：
ID NQ
1234565b0102
TI
<profile_bitmap> integer ,uint64 ,one bit is a profile support or not.
0 :not support ,1 supported
N F LY
Example : profile_bitmap value is 1 ,

EN
0x0000000000000001 means profile 1 supported ,others not supported.
bit 1 ：SPP Profile, UUID = 0x1101.
bit 2 – bit 64 ：All reserved.
Example
AT+EBTRP=1234565b0102 // read remote BT support profiles
+EBTRP：1
OK
17.11 AT+EBTSENM Read/Write security mode, encryption
mode
The command is used to read or write BT security and encryption mode. Currently we only
CO
support security mode setting. Note that the value of queried value of security mode is decide by BT
Stack, may not be the same with setting value.)
17.11.1 Format

+EBTSENM=? +EBTSENM：（0-4），
（0-2） Show if the command is supported

L218 AT DOCUMENT
OK/ERROR
+EBTSENM? +EBTSENM:<sec-mod> ， Read security mode and
<enc-mod> encryption mode
OK /ERROR
+EBTSENM=<sec-mod> ， OK / ERROR Write security mode and
<encmod> encryption mode
17.11.2 Field
< sec-mod >: integer

0- Sec_mode0_off
1- Sec_mode1_non-secure
AL
2- Sec_mode2_service
3- Sec_mode3_link
4- Sec_mod_unknown
< enc-mod >
ID NQ
0- hci_enc_mode_off
TI
1- hci_enc_mode_pt_to_pt
2- hci_enc_mode_pt_to_pt_and_bcast
Example
AT+EBTSENM=0,0 // write mode
N F LY
EN
OK
AT+EBTSENM?//read mode
+EBTSENM：0,0
OK
17.12 AT+EBTOPAD Get device list
The command is used to operate device list.
17.12.1 Format

+EBTOPAD=? +EBTOPAD: (0-4), Show if the command is supported
CO
OK/ERROR
+EBTOPAD=<n>,<address> +EBTOPAD:<index>,<addre get device list
ss >
OK /ERROR

L218 AT DOCUMENT
17.12.2 Field
Example：
1234565b0102
<n> :integer
0 delete
1 locate
2 delete all
3 most recently used
4 return total list
<index> :integer
AL
Example
AT+EBTOPAD=0,1234565b0102
OK
AT+EBTOPAD=3
ID NQ
+EBTOPAD:1,1234565b0102
TI
OK
AT+EBTOPAD=4
+EBTOPAD:1,1234565b0102
N F LY
+EBTOPAD:2,1234565b0103
EN
+EBTOPAD:3,1234565b0104
+EBTOPAD:4,1234565b0105
OK
17.13 AT+EBTSTATE Query connect manger and profile status
The command is used to query BT connect manger and profile status.
17.13.1 Format

+EBTSTATE=? +EBTSTATE ：，（ 0- Show if the command is supported
4294967295）OK/ERROR
CO
+EBTSTATE +EBTSTATE: <CM state> Query BT connect manger

OK /ERROR state
+EBTSTATE=<address>,<profi +EBTSTATE: <profile Query Profile state
le> state>
OK / ERROR

L218 AT DOCUMENT
17.13.2 Field
Example：
1234565b0102
<profile>:integer, see BT Profile SPEC for profile UUID.
Example:
4353, it means 0x1101, SPP Profile.
<CM state>:integer
1 START, BT is powering on.
2 READY, BT powered on, stand by for working.
3 PAIRING,
AL
4 INQUIRING,
5 CONNECTING,
6 CONNECTED,
7 NUKNOWN,
ID NQ
<profile state>:integer
TI
1 START, Reserved.
2 IDLE, APP for this profile not activated.
3 ACTIVATE, APP for this profile activated.
N F LY
4 AUTHORIZING, authorizing for connection.

EN
5 DISCONNECTING, disconnecting for connection.
6 DEACTIVATING, deactivating for profile APP.
Example
AT+EBTSTATE=1234565b0102,1 //query profile state
+EBTSTATE:2
OK
AT+EBTSTATE// query cm state
+EBTSTATE:2
OK
17.14 AT+EBTENSNIFF Set or get SNIFF mode level
The command is used to read or set BT sniff level.

CO
17.14.1 Format

+EBTENSNIFF=? +EBTENSNIFF ：（ 0-1 ）， Show if the command is
（0-4） supported
OK/ERROR

L218 AT DOCUMENT
AT+EBTENSNIFF=<op>,[<level +EBTENSNIFF:<level > Read/Write BT sniff level

>] OK / ERROR
17.14.2 Field
<op>: integer
0 write
1 read
<level>:integer
0 reserved.
1 reserved.
2 reserved.
AL
3 reserved.
Example
AT+EBTENSNIFF=0,0// set
OK
ID NQ
AT+EBTENSNIFF=1 // read
TI
+EBTENSNIFF:0
OK
N F LY
17.15 AT+EBTRSSI Read BT device signal level

EN
The command is used to read BT device signal level. Only we can get the valid RSSI value
when the <address> is connected.
17.15.1 Format

+EBTRSSI=? OK/ERROR Show if the command is supported
+EBTRSSI=<address> +EBTRSSI:<signal > Read BT signal
OK /ERROR
17.15.2 Field
CO
<address>: BT addr string ,no need use " " double quotes ，length should be 12 characters
Example：
1234565b0102
<signal>:integer
Example

L218 AT DOCUMENT
AT+EBTRSSI=1234565b0102
+EBTRSSI:32
OK
17.16 AT+EBTPACT (De)Active BT profiles
The command is used to (de)active BT profiles.
17.16.1 Format

+EBTPACT=? +EBTPACT ：（ 0- Show if the command is
18446744073709551615） supported
AL
OK/ERROR
+EBTPACT=<profile-bitmap> +EBTPACT:< profilebitmap (de)active BT profiles
>
ID NQ
TI OK / ERROR
17.16.2 Field
N F LY
EN
<profile_bitmap> integer ,uint64 ,one bit is a profile support or not.
0 :not support ,1 supported
Example : profile_bitmap value is 3 ,
0x0000000000000011 means profile 1 ,2 supported ,others not supported.
bit 1 ：SPP Profile, UUID = 0x1101.
bit 2 – bit 64 ：All reserved.
Example
AT+EBTPACT=1
+EBTPACT：1
OK
17.17 AT+EBTCONN Connect BT profile
The command is used to connect BT profile.

CO
17.17.1 Format

+EBTCONN=? +EBTCONN：（0-1），，（0- Show if the command is
4294967295），（0-1） supported

L218 AT DOCUMENT
OK/ERROR
+EBTCONN=<n>,<address>,<pr OK / ERROR Write BT address
ofile>,<role>
17.17.2 Field
Example：
1234565b0102
<n>: integer
0 Disconnect
AL
1 Connect
<profile>:integer, see BT Profile SPEC for profile UUID.
Example:
ID NQ
<role>:integer,profile role.
TI
1 server
0 client
Example
AT+EBTCONN=1,1234565b0102,32,1
N F LY
EN
OK
+EBTCONN:1,1234565b0102,32,1
17.18 URC: Pair indication +EBTPAIR
The command is used to notify other device want to pair local BT, and may be need input
password or pin code.
17.18.1 Format

+EBTPAIR:<address>,<name>,<enable 16digitspin>[,<password>]
CO
17.18.2 Field
Example：
1234565b0102

L218 AT DOCUMENT
< enable 16digitspin>: integer
0 not enable the 16digits pin
0 enable the 16 digits pin
<password>:String
Example
+EBTPAIR:1234565b0102 ,devicename,0,123456
17.19 URC: Pair indication +EBTINQ
The command is used to notify other BT device are found.

It should be output after command AT+EBTINQ.
AL
17.19.1 Format

ID NQ
+EBTTINQ:<address>,<name>
TI
17.19.2 Field
N F LY
EN
Example：
1234565b0102
Example
+EBTINQ:1234565b0102 ,devicename
17.20 URC: Inquiry completed indication +EBTIND
The command is used to notify that the inquiring is completed.
17.20.1 Format
CO

+EBTIND:<result>,<is cancelled>

L218 AT DOCUMENT
17.20.2 Field
<result>: integer
0 failed
1 successful
<is cancelled>：integer
0 not be cancelled
1 be cancelled
Example
+EBTIND:1,0
17.21 URC: Passive pair response +EBTPAIRRES
AL
The command is used to notify the response of passive pairring.
17.21.1 Format
ID NQ
TI
+EBTPAIRRES:<result>,<isfirst>,[address]
N F LY
EN
17.21.2 Field
<result>: integer
0 failed
1 successful
<is first>：integer
0 not the first
1 be first
Example：
1234565b0102
Example
+EBTPAIRRES:1,0,1234565B0102
CO
17.22 URC: Notify profile connected +EBTCONN
The command is used to notify BT profile connected.

L218 AT DOCUMENT
17.22.1 Format

+EBTCONN:<result>,<address>,<profile id>
17.22.2 Field
<result>: integer
0 failed
1 successful
Example：
AL
1234565b0102
<profile id>:integer, see BT Profile SPEC for profile UUID.
ID NQ
Example:
Example
TI
+EBTCONN:1,1234565B0102,32
N F LY
17.23 URC: Notify all supported profiles are (de)active

EN
+EBTPRFAC
The command is used to notify all supported profiles are deactived or actived.
17.23.1 Format

+EBTPRFAC:<state>
17.23.2 Field
CO
<state>: integer
0 all deactived
1 all actived

L218 AT DOCUMENT
17.24 URC: Notify profile connected +EBTDISC
The command is used to notify BT connections are disconnected.
17.24.1 Format

+EBTDISC:<n>,<address>[,<profileid>,<passive>]
17.24.2 Field
AL
<n>: integer
1 one connection is disconnected
2 all connections are disconnected
ID NQ
Example： TI
1234565b0102
N F LY
Example:
EN
<passive> :integer
0 not passive disconnect
1 passive disconnected
Example
+EBTDISC:1,1234565B0102,32,0
+EBTDISC:2,1234565B0102
17.25 URC: Notify visiablity is changed +EBTVISB
The command is used to notify BT visiablity is changed.
17.25.1 Format
CO

+EBTVISB:3,<is because AT>

L218 AT DOCUMENT
17.25.2 Field
< is because AT >: integer

0 not because receive AT+EBTVISB
1 because receive AT+EBTVISB
Example
+EBTVISB:3,0
17.26 URC: Notify BT is Reset +EBTRST
The command is used to notify BT is reset.
AL
17.26.1 Format

+EBTRST:1
ID NQ
17.26.2 Field
TI
N F LY
Example
EN
+EBTRST:1
17.27 URC: Notify bond profile fail + EBTPRFBND
The command is used to notify BT bond profile fail.
17.27.1 Format

+EBTPRFBND:<profile-id>,0
CO
17.27.2 Field

Example:
Example
+EBTPRFBND:10,0

L218 AT DOCUMENT
17.28 URC: Notify BT devices need connect our profile
+EBTPRFAU
The command is used to notify other BT devices need connect our profile .
17.28.1 Format

+EBTPRFAU:<Profileid>,<address>,<name>
AL
17.28.2 Field
Example：
ID NQ
1234565b0102
TI
N F LY
Example:
EN
Example
+EBTPRFAU:3,1234565B0102,devicename
17.29 URC: Notify profile connected +EBTPRFCN
The command is used to notify BT profile connected.
17.29.1 Format

+EBTPRFCN:<profile>,<ret>
CO
17.29.2 Field

Example:
<ret>:integer

L218 AT DOCUMENT
0 failed
1 successful
Example
+EBTPRFCN:3,1
17.30 URC: Notify profile disconnected +EBTPRFDSCN
The command is used to notify BT profile disconnected.
17.30.1 Format

+EBTPRFCN:<profile>,<address>
AL
17.30.2 Field
ID NQ
Example:
TI

N F LY
EN
Example：
1234565b0102
Example
+EBTPRFDSCN:3,1234565B0102
CO

L218 AT DOCUMENT
18 BT SPP Profile AT Command
Currently, SPP profile has no AT CMD. But with AT+EBTCONN we can connect SPP Server or
be connected as a Server.
AL
ID NQ
TI
N F LY
EN
CO

L218 AT DOCUMENT
19 BT OPP Profile AT Command
19.1 AT+EOPPPUSH OPP client push files
The command is used by OPP client to push files to specified OPP server.
19.1.1 Format

+EOPPPUSH=<address>,<file1 OK/ERROR Max 5 files can be sent in this
AL
>[,<file2>[,...,[<file5]]] command
ID NQ
19.1.2 Field TI
< address >: OPP server BT address string ,no need use " " double quotes ，length should be 12
characters.
<file1>: First file to send. User must give full file path. "" double quotes are required.
N F LY
EN
<file2>…<file5>: optional files to send. Must use "" double quotes. If you send several files and some
file paths are not valid, we‘ll try to send valid file paths. Valid file path count will be reported in URC
+EOPPPUSH
file path should use utf-8 encoding
Example：
AT+EOPPPUSH = 1234565b0102, "Z:/AAA/bbb.file”,”Z:/cc.file”
It means ： send to device with BT address "1234565b0102". Send 2 local files:
Z:\AAA\bbb.file, Z:\cc.file
If you input 3 file path and only 2 is valid, we’ll try to send two correct
files. Total valid files will be returned as URC “EOPPPUSH” filed.
19.2 URC: Notify when send finish +EOPPPUSH
The command is used to notify when OPP push transaction is finished.

CO
19.2.1 Format

+EOPPPUSH:<result>,<Total_files>,<address>,<file>

L218 AT DOCUMENT
19.2.2 Field
<result>: uint 8, 0 succeed, others are error code.

Example: 0b0000000000000101: file 1 and file 3 are successfully sent.
<total_files> : total valid file path. This param is used to notify user how many valid files in
AT+EOPPPUSH command. They should expect same amount of +EOPPPUSH URC for this AT
command.
<address>: OPP server BT address string ,no " " double quotes ，length should be 12 characters.
<file>: indicates the file name for this URC
Example
+EOPPPUSH:1,5,1234565B0102,”Z:/aaa.txt”
19.3 AT+EOPPABORT Abort current OPP transaction with one
AL
device
ID NQ
The command is used by OPP client/server to abort OPP transaction with one device. If OPP
TI
client is sending multiple objects to server, this command will only abort current sending
object.
19.3.1 Format
N F LY
EN
+EOPPABORT=<address> OK/ERROR
19.3.2 Field
< address >: address string ,no need use " " double quotes ，length should be 12 characters.
Example：
AT+EABOART=1234565b0102
It means ：abort OPP transaction with BT address "1234565b0102".
19.4 URC: Notify when OPP server receive OPP client send request
CO
+EOPPRECV
The command is used to notify when OPP server receive OPP client send requset.

L218 AT DOCUMENT
19.4.1 Format

+EOPPRECV: <address>,<device_name>,<obj_name>,<MIME>
19.4.2 Field
<device_name>: OPP client BT name string, with double quote””. UTF8 encoded
<address>: OPP client BT address
<obj_name>: object name, max 128 chars. with double quotes"". UTF8 encoded.
<MIME>: MIME string, max 80 chars. with double quote""
Example
AL
+EOPPRECV: 1234565B0102, “My BT device”, ”aa.txt”, ”text/plain”
It means: device "My BT device" with address "1234565B0102" want to send "aa.txt", which
MIME type is "text/plain". Do you want to accept it?
ID NQ
TI
19.5 AT+EOPPACCEPT OPP server decide whether accept push
request by OPP client

N F LY
EN
The command is used by OPP server to determine whether it accept an object by OPP client.
19.5.1 Format

+EOPPACCEPT= <result>, OK/ERROR
<address>,<path>
19.5.2 Field
< address >: address string ,no need use "" double quotes ，length should be 12 characters.
<result>: bool, 1 means accept, 0 means reject;
CO
<path>: full file path to store this object. Double quotes required
Example：
AT+EOPPACCEPT= 1, 1234565b0102,”Z:\aa.txt”
It means ：Accept object send by client with BT address "1234565b0102" and store it as
"Z:\aa.txt".

L218 AT DOCUMENT
19.6 URC: Notify when OPP server receive finish +EOPPACCEPT
The command is used to notify when OPP server complete receiving one object
19.6.1 Format

+EOPPACCEPT: <result>,<address>,<obj_name>
19.6.2 Field
AL
<address>: OPP client BT address
<obj_name>: object name, max 128 chars. with double quote"" and UTF8 encoded
Example
+EOPPRECV: 1234565B0102, ”aa.txt”
ID NQ
It means: finish receiving "aa.txt" from device "1234565B0102"
TI
N F LY
EN
CO

L218 AT DOCUMENT
20 BT PBAP Profile AT Command
20.1 AT+EPBPLIST PBAP client get PBH list
The command is used by PBAP client to get PBH list
20.1.1 Format

+EPBPLIST=<address>, OK/ERROR Query PBH list
AL
<folder>,[<MaxListCount>,
[<ListStartOffset>,
[<searchattr>,<searchval>]]]
ID NQ
20.1.2 Field
TI
< address >: PBAP server BT address string ,no need use " " double quotes ，length should be 12
N F LY
EN
characters.
<folder>: folder name, 1-10
telecom/pb 1
telecom/ich 2
telecom/och 3
telecom/mch 4
telecom/cch 5
SIM1/telecom/pb 6
SIM1/telecom/ich 7
SIM1/telecom/och 8
SIM1/telecom/mch 9
SIM1/telecom/cch 10
<MaxListCount>: maximum number of entries that PBAP client can handle. <ListStartOffset>: offset
to
CO
the first entry of PHB. default value is 0.

<searchattr>: 1-3; 1: name; 2:Number; 3:sound;
<searchval>: key word string. Double quotes required. should be UTF8 encoded
Example：
AT+EPBPLIST= 1234565b0102,1,200,0
It means ：query PBH list from "234565b0102" max list item is 200, offset is 0.
AT+EPBPLIST= 1234565b0102,1,200,0,1,”a”
It means ：query PBH list from "234565b0102" max list item is 200, offset is 0. server only
L218 AT DOCUMENT
return contact whose name contains "a".
20.2 URC: Notify when finish pulling list +EPBPLIST
The command is used to notify when PBAP Client finish pulling list
20.2.1 Format

+EPBPLIST: <result>,<address>,<path>
AL
20.2.2 Field
<result>: bool, 1 succeed, 0 fail

<address>: PBAP server BT address
ID NQ
<path>: full file path of list vCard file. with double quote"" and UTF8 encoded
TI
Example
+EPBPLIST: 1, 1234565B0102,”Z:/@pbap/list.vcd”
It means: get PHB list from device "1234565B0102" succeed
N F LY
EN
20.3 AT+EPBAPENTRY PBAP client pull vCard entry
The command is used by PBAP client to get phonebook entry. It will return vCard 2.1 file.
20.3.1 Format

+EPBPENTRY = <address>,<folder>, OK/ERROR Download PHB entry
<object>,[<filter>]
20.3.2 Field
CO
<address>: PBAP server BT address string ,no need use " " double quotes ，length should be 12
characters.
<folder>: folder name, 1-10
telecom/pb 1
telecom/ich 2
telecom/och 3
telecom/mch 4

L218 AT DOCUMENT
telecom/cch 5
SIM1/telecom/pb 6
SIM1/telecom/ich 7
SIM1/telecom/och 8
SIM1/telecom/mch 9
SIM1/telecom/cch 10
<object>: object name, 1-10, max 64 uint16. double quotes required.
<filter>: 32 bit filter. Indicate the attributes contained in the requested vCard objects. Refer to PBAP
Spec Table 5.2 Attribute Mask. Default value will only filter out PHOTO (0xFFF7). If given filter is 0,
we‘ll use default filter.
Example：
AT+ EPBPENTRY=1234565b0102,1,”001.vcf”, 0xFFF7
It means ： get phonebook entry "001.vcf" from "1234565b0102", associated photo not
required.
AL
20.4 URC: Notify when finish pulling list +EPBPDL
ID NQ
TI
20.4.1 Format
N F LY

EN
+ EPBPDL: <result>,<address>,<path>
20.4.2 Field

<path>: full file path to store returned vcard file.
Example
+ EPBPDL: 1, 1234565B0102,”Z:/@pbapc/temp.vcf”
It means: get PHB list from device "1234565B0102" fail
20.5 AT+EPBPDLCH PBAP client download call history

CO
The command is used by PBAP client to download one category of call history. It will return
vCard 2.1 file.
20.5.1 Format

L218 AT DOCUMENT
+EPBPDLCH=<address>,<folder>, OK/ERROR Download call history

[<MaxListCount>,<ListStartOffset>,<
filter>]
20.5.2 Field
<path>: full file path to store returned vcard file. Double quotes required
<address>: PBAP server BT address string ,no need use " " double quotes ，length should be 12
characters.
<folder>: folder name, 2-10. 6 is not valid
telecom/ich 2
telecom/och 3
AL
telecom/mch 4
telecom/cch 5
SIM1/telecom/ich 7
SIM1/telecom/och 8
ID NQ
SIM1/telecom/mch 9 TI
SIM1/telecom/cch 10
<MaxListCount>: maximum number of entries that PBAP client can handle.
<ListStartOffset>: offset to the first entry of CH. Default value is 0.
<filter>: 32 bit filter. Indicate the attributes contained in the requested vCard objects.
N F LY
Refer to
EN
PBAP Spec Table 5.2 Attribute Mask. Default value will select
FN/N/TEL/X-IRMC-CALLDATETIME
(0x10000083). If given filter is 0, we’ll use default filter.
Example：
AT+EPBPLIST= 1234565b0102, 2, 30
It means ：query Incoming call history from "1234565b0102", max list item is 300, offset is 0.
20.6 URC: Notify when finish pulling list +EPBPDLCH
20.6.1 Format
CO

+EPBPDLCH: <result>,<address>,<path>

L218 AT DOCUMENT
20.6.2 Field

Example
+EOPPRECV: 0, 1234565B0102,”Z:/@pbapc/call_history.vcf”
It means: get CH list from device "1234565B0102" fail
AL
ID NQ
TI
N F LY
EN
CO

L218 AT DOCUMENT
21 BT A2DP AVRCP AT Command
21.1 AT+EBTA2DP
The command is used to play or pause a2dp audio file.
21.1.1 Format

+EBTA2DP=<play/pause>, <bt +EBTA2DP:<result> Play/pause a2dp audio
AL
addr>,<”file name”>,<sample result: 0 fail file
rate>,<stereo> 1 success
ID NQ
21.1.2 Field
TI
<play/pause> (0,1).play:1,pause:0.
<bt addr>:" 0x0-0xFFFFFFFFFFFF"
N F LY
EN
<"file name">: string type
<sample rate >: (32000, 44100,48000).
<stereo>:(0,1)
Example：
AT+EBTA2DP=1, DB4BDD130018,
“ 005A003A005C0063007300300031002E0061006D0072io file.f
+EBTA2DP:1
It means ：start paly a2dp audio file, bt addr is DB4BDD130018, file name is cs01.amr, sample
rate is 32000, not a stereo.
AT+EBTA2DP=0
+EBTA2DP:1
It means ：pause play a2dp audio file.
21.2 URC: +EBTAVRCP

CO
The command is used to notify when bluetooth handset press button.
21.2.1 Format

+EBTAVRCP: <command>,<key event>
L218 AT DOCUMENT
21.2.2 Field
<command>:
Paly 0x44
Pause 0x46
Forward 0x4B
Backward 0x4C
<key event>：key down: 0, key up: 1
Example
+EBTAVRCP:75,0
+EBTAVRCP:75,1
AL
It means: Bluetooth headset need to play previous audio file.
ID NQ
TI
N F LY
EN
CO

L218 AT DOCUMENT
22 BT HFP Profile AT Command
22.1 AT+EHFCLCC
The command is used to query current call info from AG.
22.1.1 Format

+EHFCLCC? OK/ERROR
AL
22.1.2 Field
ID NQ
None
Example
TI
There should be a BT connection between HF and AG, and please refer to NOTE for details.
AT+EHFCLCC?
N F LY
EN
[Result]
OK
+EHFCIEV:2,075526630099,1
NOTE:
The precondition should be,
1> Power on BT by “at+ebtpwr=0”
After power on successfully, the HF(M2M) will receive
+EBTPRFAC:1
OK
2> Require a BT connection between the HF(M2M) and AG(smart phone):
Use Smartphone to initial a BT connection, and HF will receive
+EBTPAIR:65727146FEE1,,0,360695
And HF needs to send “at+ebtpaircnf=1”to setup the BT connection .
Then HF will receive
CO
OK
It means BT connection full established. And the command for HFP will run properly.
22.2 URC: Notify when call state changed finish +EHFCIEV
The command is used to notify when call state changed.

L218 AT DOCUMENT
22.2.1 Format

+EHFCIEV:<state>, <phb_num>,<call index>
22.2.2 Field
<state>: int
0, call complete
1, outgoing call
2, incoming call
4, call setup
AL
8, current call is hold
<phb_num>: string
Example
ID NQ
[precondition]
TI
+EHFCIEV: 0, 075526630099, 1
22.3 AT+EHFATA
N F LY
EN
The command is used to accept an incoming call from AG/HF.
22.3.1 Format

+EHFATA=<role> OK/ERROR Only support HF now.
22.3.2 Field
< role>: bool

0, accept incoming call by AG. Current role is AG, AT+ATA
1, accept incoming call by HF.
Example
CO
[precondition]
[Case 1]
Only one incoming call
AT+EHFATA=1//accept the incoming call
[Result]
+EHFCIEV:2,075526630099,1//incoming call
at+ehfata=1
OK
L218 AT DOCUMENT
+EHFCIEV:4,075526630099,1//incoming call actived

[Case 2]
One active/held call and incoming call
AT+EHFATA=1//accept the incoming call, put the active call on held(if any)
[Result]
+EHFCIEV:4,13243764932,1//active call
+EHFCIEV:2,075526630099,2//incoming call
at+ehfata=1
OK
+EHFCIEV:4,13243764932,1
+EHFCIEV:2,075526630099,2
+EHFCIEV:8,13243764932,1//held
+EHFCIEV:4,075526630099,2//active
[Case 3]
AL
One active, one hold call, and there is an incoming call
AT+EHFATA=1// Terminate all active calls (if any), and accept the incoming call
[Result]
ID NQ
+EHFCIEV:8,13243764932,1//hold
TI
+EHFCIEV:4,10010,2//active call
+EHFCIEV:2,075526630099,3
at+ehfata=1
OK
N F LY
+EHFCIEV:0,10010,2
EN
+EHFCIEV:8,13243764932,1
+EHFCIEV:2,075526630099,3
+EHFCIEV:8,13243764932,1
+EHFCIEV:4,075526630099,3
22.4 AT+EHFATD
The command is used to start phone connection by AG/HF.
22.4.1 Format

+EHFATD= <role>,<type>[, OK/ERROR Only support HF and dial with
CO
<number>] phone number now.
22.4.2 Field
<role>:
0, Initial an outgoing call by AG
L218 AT DOCUMENT
1, Initial an outgoing call by HF

<type>:
0, dial with string
1, redial last number
2, dial with memory(dial with phone number stored in AG phonebook)
<number>:
String with "0~9" or phone number index in AG phonebook.
When type is 0, use phone number string, and when type is 2, use phone number index.
Example
[precondition]
[Case 1]
AT+EHFATD=1,0,"075526630099"//initial an outgoing call
[Result]
at+ehfatd=1,0, 075526630099
AL
OK
+EHFCIEV:1, 075526630099,1
[Case 2]
ID NQ
AT+EHFATD=1,2,1//initial an outgoing call with the first phone number in AG phonebook
[Result]
at+ehfatd=1,2,1
OK
TI
+EHFCIEV:1,13243764932,1
N F LY
EN
22.5 AT+EHFCHUP
The command is used by AG/HF to terminate the current call.
22.5.1 Format

+EHFCHUP=<role> OK/ERROR Only support HF now.
22.5.2 Field
CO
< role>:
0, terminate call connection by AG
1, terminate call connection by HF.
Example
[precondition]
[Case]
AT+EHFCHUP=1//hangup current call
[Result]
L218 AT DOCUMENT
+EHFCIEV:2,075526630099,2
at+ehfchup=1
OK
+EHFCIEV:0,075526630099,2
22.6 AT+EHFCHLD
The command is used by AG/HF to release/hold/retrieve/swap call.
22.6.1 Format

+EHFCHLD=<role>,<act>[,<index>] OK/ERROR Only support HF now.
AL
22.6.2 Field
ID NQ
<role>:
0, act from AG
1, act from HF
TI
N F LY
<act>[,<index>]
EN
0, releases all held calls
1, release all active calls and accepts the other (waiting or held)call
1,x, release the specific active call x
2, place all active calls on hold and accept the (waiting or held) call
2,x, place all active calls, except call x, on hold
3, add a held call to conference call
4, swap/retrieve
<index>: int
1~127
Example
[precondition]
[Case 1]
AT+EHFCHLD=1, 0// release all held calls
[Result]
CO
+EHFCIEV:2,075526630099,1
at+ehfchld=1,0
OK
+EHFCIEV:0,075526630099,1
[Case 2]
AT+EHFCHLD=1, 1// release all active calls and accepts the other (waiting or //held)call, supported
in
multiple call.
L218 AT DOCUMENT
[Result]
+EHFCIEV:2,075526630099,1
at+ehfchld=1,1
OK
+EHFCME:100
+EHFCIEV:2,075526630099,1
[Case 3]
AT+EHFCHLD=1, 1,x// release the specific active call x, only supported in //conference call
[Result]
+EHFCIEV:2,075526630099,1
at+ehfchld=1,1,1
OK
+EHFCME:100
+EHFCIEV:2,075526630099,1
AL
[Case 4]
AT+EHFCHLD=1, 2// place all active calls on hold and accept the (waiting or held) call, //only
supported in multiple call
ID NQ
[Result]
at+ehfchld=1,2
OK
TI
+EHFCIEV:2,075526630099,1
+EHFCIEV:2,075526630099,1
N F LY
+EHFCIEV:4,075526630099,1
EN
[Case 5]
AT+EHFCHLD=1, 2,x// place all active calls, except call x, on hold, only //supported in conference
call
[Result]
+EHFCIEV:2,075526630099,1
at+ehfchld=1,2,1
OK
+EHFCME:100
+EHFCIEV:2,075526630099,1
[Case 6]
AT+EHFCHLD=1, 3// add a held call to conference call
[Result]
+EHFCIEV:2,075526630099,1
at+ehfchld=1,3
CO
OK
+EHFCIEV:2,075526630099,1
[Case 7]
AT+EHFCHLD=1, 4// swap the active/held call
[Result]
+EHFCIEV:2,075526630099,1
at+ehfchld=1,4

L218 AT DOCUMENT
OK
+EHFCIEV:2,075526630099,1
+EHFCIEV:4,075526630099,1
22.7 AT+EHFVTS
The command is used to transmit DTMF codes by HF.
22.7.1 Format

+EHFVTS=<digit> OK/ERROR
AL
22.7.2 Field
ID NQ
<digit>: U8, digit should one of "*# 0-9"
TI
Example
[precondition]
[Case]
N F LY
AT+EHFVTS=*//play tone
EN
[Result]
OK
22.8 AT+EHFRVC
The command is used to (Remote audio volume control) set or sync volume among HF/AG.
22.8.1 Format

+EHFRVC=<role>,<act>,<vol> OK/ERROR Only supported HF
CO
22.8.2 Field
<role>: bool
0, action from AG
1, action from HF
<act>: int
0, set the volume of AG speaker

L218 AT DOCUMENT
1, set the volume of AG mic

<vol>: int 0-15
Example
[precondition]
[Case]
AT+EHFRVC=1,0,15//set the volume of AG speaker
[Result]
OK
22.9 URC: Notify when call state changed finish +EHFVGS
The command is used to notify when the volume of speaker in AG changed, and will the
volume of HF speaker will sync with this.
AL
22.9.1 Format
ID NQ
TI
+EHFVGS:<value>
22.9.2 Field
N F LY
EN
<state>: int
0-15(0, means mute. And 15 means the maximum volume)
Example
[precondition]
+EHFVGS: 12
22.10 URC: Notify when call state changed finish +EHFCME
The command is used to notify when HFP AT CMD execute failed.
22.10.1 Format
CO

+EHFCME:<result>
22.10.2 Field
<state>: U8

L218 AT DOCUMENT
0-255(255 means ok, other means fail)

Example
[precondition]
+EHFCME: 100
AL
ID NQ
TI
N F LY
EN
CO

L218 AT DOCUMENT
23 GATT AT Command
23.1 AT+GATSREG (De)Register GATT Server
(De)Register GATT Server with user_id..
23.1.1 Format

+GATSREG=<op>,<user_id> +GATSREG:<op>,<result>,<user_id>
AL
OK / ERROR
ID NQ
23.1.2 Field TI
< op >:
0 deregister
1 register
N F LY
EN
<user_id>:
User id of gatt server, or the name of the gatt server.
A Hex value string, each char of it should in set { ‗0‘~‘9‘,‘a‘~‘f‘,‘A‘~‘F‘ }
Max length of it is 32.
<result>:
0 SUCCESS
Other un-success
OK / ERROR: at argument error will return ERROR, other will return OK.
23.1.3 Note
Each GATT Server AT can only send after the prior AT return OK/ERROR.
23.1.4 Example:
CO
AT+GATSREG=1,"AFAF123BC" //register a gatt server with user id "AFAF123BC"

+GATSREG=1,0, AFAF123BC
OK

L218 AT DOCUMENT
23.2 AT+GATSCON: (Dis)Connect GATT Server to another device
(Dis)Connect GATT Server.
23.2.1 Format

+GATSCON=<op>,<user_id>,<a +GATSCON:
ddr>,<direct> <op>,<result>,<user_id>,<addr>,<conn_id>
OK / ERROR
AL
23.2.2 Field
< op >:
0 disconnet
ID NQ
1 connect
<user_id>:
TI
N F LY

EN
<addr>:
BT Address string, needn‘t use "" double quotes, length should be 12.
<direct>:
0: non-direct
1: direct
<result>:
0 SUCCESS
Other un-success
<conn_id>:
The id of this connection.
23.2.3 Note
CO
23.2.4 Example:
AT+GATSCON=1,"AFAF123BC",1234565b0102,1 // connect server to another device whose LAP is

0x123456, UAP is 0x5b, NAP is 0x0102.
+GATSCON: 1,0, AFAF123BC,1234565b0102,2
L218 AT DOCUMENT
OK
23.3 URC +GATSCON: indicate server a connection’s status
Notify server a connection‘s status.
23.3.1 Format
URC
+GATSCON:
<op>,<result>,<user_id>,<addr>,<conn_id>
AL
23.3.2 Field
<op>:
ID NQ
0: disconnect TI
1: connect
<result>:
0: Success
N F LY
Other: un-success
EN
<user_id>:
<addr>:
Address of peer. HEX value.
<conn_id>:
23.3.3 Note
23.3.4 Example:
CO
+GATSCON: 1,0,1809, 1234565b0102,33
23.4 AT+GATSS Add/remove a service
Add or remove a service to or from a GATT Server.

L218 AT DOCUMENT
23.4.1 Format

+GATSS=<op>,<user_id>,<uuid +GATSS:
>,<num_handles>,<is_primary>, <op>,<result>,<user_id>,<uuid>,<inst>,<is_p
<inst> rimary>,<service_handle>
OK / ERROR
23.4.2 Field
< op >:
0 remove
AL
1 add
<user_id>:
ID NQ
<uuid>:
TI
The uuid of service, a string with hex value, max len is 32, min len is 4.
<num_handles>:
N F LY
Number of handles of this service. Dec format.

EN
<is_primary>
0: not primary
1: primary
<inst>
Instance id of this uuid. Dec format.
<result>:
0: Success
Other: un-success
<service_handle>:
Service handle of this service. Dec format.
23.4.3 Note
CO
23.4.4 Example:
AT+GATSS=1,"aabb230","0123456789abcdefa",4,1,254
+GATSS: 1,0, aabb230, 0123456789abcdefa,254,1,32765
OK
L218 AT DOCUMENT
23.5 AT+GATSI Add/remove a include service
Add or remove an include service to or from service.
23.5.1 Format

+GATSI=<op>,<user_id>,<servic +GATSI:
e_handle>,<inc_service_handle> <op>,<result>,<user_id>,<service_handle>,<i
nc_service_handle>
OK/ERROR
AL
23.5.2 Field
<op>:
ID NQ
0 remove
1 add
<user_id>:
TI
N F LY
EN
<service_handle>:
< inc_service_handle >:
Service handle of this include service. Dec format.
<result>:
0: Success
Other: un-success
23.5.3 Note
CO
23.5.4 Example:
AT+GATSI=1,"aabb230",1199,19900
+GATSI: 1,0, aabb230,1199,19900
OK

L218 AT DOCUMENT
23.6 AT+GATSC Add/remove a characteristic to/from an existed
service
Add or remove an include service to or from service.
23.6.1 Format

+GATSC=<op>,<user_id>,<servi +GATSC:
ce_handle>,<char_uuid>,<inst>, <op>,<result>,<user_id>,<service_handle>,<
<prop>,<permission> char_uuid>,<inst>,<char_handle>
AL
OK/ERROR
23.6.2 Field
ID NQ
<op>:
0 remove
TI
1 add
N F LY
<user_id>:
EN
<service_handle>:
<char_uuid>:
The uuid of characteristic, a string with hex value, max len is 32, min len is 4.
<inst>
Instance id of this uuid. Dec format.
<prop>
prop of this characteristic. Dec format. ( 0 - 4294967295)
<permission>
permission of this characteristic. Dec format. ( 0 - 4294967295)
<result>:
CO
0: Success
Other: un-success
< char_handle>:
Characteristic handle of this Characteristic . Dec format.

L218 AT DOCUMENT
23.6.3 Note
23.6.4 Example:
AT+GATSC=1," aabb230",0099,"0123456789abcdef",2,12313,4444
+GATSC: 1,0, aabb230,99, "0123456789abcdef",2,9980
OK
23.7 AT+GATSD Add/remove a descriptor to/from an existed
service
AL
Add or remove an descriptor to or from an existed characteristic.
ID NQ
23.7.1 Format
Command
+GATSD=<op>,<user_id>,<servi +GATSD:
N F LY
ce_handle>,<desc_uuid>,<inst>, <op>,<result>,<user_id>,<service_handle>,<
EN
<permission> desc_uuid>,<inst>,<desc_handle>
OK/ERROR
23.7.2 Field
<op>:
0 remove
1 add
<user_id>:
CO
<service_handle>:
Handle of characteristic . Dec format.
<desc_uuid>:
The uuid of descriptor, a string with hex value, max len is 32, min len is 4.
<inst>
Instance id of the descriptor uuid. Dec format.
<permission>
permission of this descriptor. Dec format. ( 0 - 4294967295)
L218 AT DOCUMENT
<result>:
0: Success
Other: un-success
<desc_handle>:
Handle of this descriptor. Dec format.
23.7.3 Note
23.7.4 Example:
AL
AT+GATSD=1," aabb230",99,"0123456789abcdef",2,12313
+GATSD: 1,0, aabb230,99, 0123456789abcdef,2,9999
OK
ID NQ
TI
23.8 AT+GATSST Start/stop a service
Start or stop a service.

N F LY
EN
23.8.1 Format

+GATSST=<op>,<user_id>,<ser +GATSST:
vice_handle>,<transport> <op>,<result>,<user_id>,<service_handle>
OK/ERROR
23.8.2 Field
<op>:
0 stop
1 start
<user_id>:
CO

<service_handle>:
Handle of service . Dec format.
<transport>
transport to start service.

L218 AT DOCUMENT
0 : LE,
1 : BREDR,
2 : Dual
<result>:
0: Success
Other: un-success
23.8.3 Note
23.8.4 Example:
AL
AT+GATSST=1," aabb230",99,1
+GATSST: 1,0, aabb230,9987
OK
ID NQ
TI
23.9 AT+GATSIND Send an indication to a client
send an indication to a client.

N F LY
EN
23.9.1 Format

+GATSIND=<user_id>,<conn_id +GATSIND:
>,<attr_handle>,<need_confirm> <result>,<user_id>,<conn_id>,<attr_handle>,
,<value> <need_confirm>
OK/ERROR
23.9.2 Field
<user_id>:
CO

<conn_id>:
<attr_handle>:
Handle of attrbuite. Dec format.
<need_confirm>:

L218 AT DOCUMENT
Need client confirm or not. 0: no, 1: yes.

<value>
The value need to be notify . Hex format.
<result>:
0: Success
Other: un-success
23.9.3 Note
23.9.4 Example:
AL
AT+GATSIND="1806",1,1321,0,"abcdefghigk"
+GATSIND:0,1806,1,1321,1
OK
ID NQ
TI
23.10 AT+GATSRSP Send response to a client
send response to a client.

N F LY
EN
23.10.1 Format

+GATSRSP=<user_id>,<result>, +GATSRSP:
<conn_id>,<trans_id>,<attr_han <result>,<user_id>,<conn_id>,<attr_handle>,
dle>,<value> <need_confirm>
OK/ERROR
23.10.2 Field
<user_id>:
CO

<result>:
Result of response for client request. 0-255
<conn_id>:
<trans_id>:

L218 AT DOCUMENT
id of the current transaction. 0 - 255.

<attr_handle>:
<value>
The value need to be notified . Hex format.
<result>:
0: Success
Other: un-success
<need_confirm>:
Need client confirm or not. 0: no, 1: yes.
23.10.3 Note
AL
23.10.4 Example:
ID NQ
TI
AT+GATSRSP="1806",1,0,2,9999,"aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa:"
+GATSRSP: 0,1806,1, 9999,0
OK/ERROR
N F LY
EN
23.11 URC +GATRREQ: Indicate server that a client has a read
request
Notify server a client‘s read request.
23.11.1 Format
URC
+GATRREQ:
<user_id>,<conn_id>,<trans_id>,<addr>,<attr
_handle>,<is_long>,<offset>
CO
23.11.2 Field
<user_id>:

L218 AT DOCUMENT
<conn_id>:
<trans_id>:
<addr>:
<attr_handle>:
<is_long>:
Tell server that the request is one of several requests.
<offset>:
Offset of the request. 0 – 65535
23.11.3 Note
AL
23.11.4 Example:
ID NQ
TI
+GATRREQ: 2202,3,4, 1234565b0102,10010,1,9980
23.12 URC +GATWREQ: indicate server that a client has a write

N F LY
request
EN
Notify server a client‘s write request.
23.12.1 Format
URC
+GATWREQ:
<user_id>,<conn_id>,<trans_id>,<addr>,<attr
_handle>,<value>,<need_rsp>,<is_prepare>,
<offset>
23.12.2 Field
CO
<user_id>:
<conn_id>:
L218 AT DOCUMENT
<trans_id>:
<addr>:
<attr_handle>:
Handle of attribute. DEC format.
<value>
The value need to be write. Hex format.
<need_rsp>
Whether client need server‘s response. 1 yes, 0 no.
<is_prepare>
Whether or not server execute request immediately. 1 no, 2 yes..
<offset>:
Offset of the request. 0 – 65535
AL
23.12.3 Note
ID NQ
23.12.4 Example:
TI
+GATWREQ: 2202,3,4, 1234565b0102,10010,ABABABABABABABABABA,1,1,0
N F LY
23.13 URC +GATEWREQ: indicate server that a client ask server

EN
to exec or cancel the write request indicated (trans_id) before
Notify server to execute the request.
23.13.1 Format
URC
+GATEWREQ:
<user_id>,<conn_id>,<trans_id>,<addr>,<ca
ncel>
CO
23.13.2 Field
<user_id>:
<conn_id>:
L218 AT DOCUMENT

<trans_id>:
<addr>:
<cancel>:
To execute the transaction or cancel it. 1 cancel, 0 exec.
23.13.3 Note
23.13.4 Example:
+GATEWREQ: 2202,3,4, 1234565b0102,1
AL
OR
ID NQ
TI
N F LY
EN
CO

L218 AT DOCUMENT
24 Audio AT Command
These commands are supported only on L216 project.
24.1 AT+EECHO Echo Cancellation
The command is used to activate or deactivate echo cancelation. This command should only
sent to target before a call setup
24.1.1 Format
AL
+EECHO=? +EECHO: (list of supported
<status>)
ID NQ
+EECHO?
TI OK / ERROR
+EECHO:<status>
OK /ERROR
+EECHO =<status> OK / ERROR
N F LY
EN
24.1.2 Field
<status >: integer

0 Deactivate echo cancellation
1 activate Echo cancellation
Example
AT+EECHO=?
+EECHO: (0,1)
OK
AT+EECHO? //Shows the current configuration
+EECHO: 1
OK
CO
AT+EECHO=0 //Deactivate echo cancellation

OK
AT+EECHO?
+EECHO: 0 //Echo cancellation is deactivated
OK
AT+EECHO=1 //Activate echo cancellation
OK
Note: EECHO setting will be saved to NVRAM

L218 AT DOCUMENT
24.2 AT+ ENOISE Noise Cancellation
The command is used to activate or deactivate noise cancelation. This command should only
sent to target before a call setup
24.2.1 Format

+ENOISE=? +ENOISE:(list of supported <Receive>s),
(list of supported
<Transmit>s)
OK /ERROR
AL
+ENOISE? +ENOISE:<Receive>,<Transmit>
OK /ERROR
+ENOISE=<Receive>,<Transmit> OK / ERROR
ID NQ
24.2.2 Field
TI
<Receive>: integer
N F LY
0 OFF
EN
1 ON
<Transmit>: integer
0 OFF
1 ON
Example
AT+ENOISE=?
+ENOISE: (0-1),(0-1)
OK
AT+ENOISE? //Shows the current configuration
+ENOISE:1,1
OK
AT+ENOISE=0,0 // Disable uplink and downlink noise suppression
OK
AT+ENOISE=1,1 //Enable uplink and downlink noise suppression
CO
OK
AT+ENOISE=0,1 //Enable uplink and disable downlink noise suppression
OK
Note: ENOISE setting will be saved to NVRAM

L218 AT DOCUMENT
24.3 AT+ESST Set Side Tone
The command is used to set side tone.
24.3.1 Format

+ESST=? +ESST: (list of supported <level>s)
OK /ERROR
+ESST? +ESST: <level>
OK /ERROR
+ESST=<level> OK /ERROR
AL
24.3.2 Field
ID NQ
< level >: integer
TI
0-255: Side tone value (side tone gain from 0 o 255)
0 : disable Side tone
Example
N F LY
AT+ESST=?
EN
+EST: (0-255)
OK
AT+ESST? //Shows the current value
+EST: 8
OK
AT+ESST=240 //Set side tone gain to 240
OK
AT+ESST=0 //Disable side tone
OK
Note: Side tone level will not be saved to NVRAM
24.4 AT+ EPAU Play Audio File

CO
The command is used to play audio file .
24.4.1 Format

+EPAU=<mode>[,<volume>] OK /ERROR
,<audio_file>

L218 AT DOCUMENT
[,<style>] [,<output path>]
24.4.2 Field
<mode>: integer type

1 Start playing
2 Stop playing
<volume>: integer which defines the sound level (0-6). The smaller the lower.
<audio_file> : string type
Indicates the path and midi filename to be played.
This is a must when <mode> is 1
<style> :integer type
AL
1 INFINITE
2 ONCE
<output_path> integer type
4 earphone
ID NQ
5 loudspeaker TI
Example
To play a file:
AT+ EPAU =1, 3,"005A003A005C0063007300300031002E006D00690064", 2, 5 // Play
file"Z:\cs01.mid" in volumn 3 for loudspeaker,
N F LY
OK
EN
To stop playing immediately:
AT+ EPAU =2 //stop playing
OK
24.5 AT+ EPCLK Configure PCM Digital Audio
The command is used to configure PCM digital audio.
24.5.1 Format

+EPCLK=? (list of supported <BitClk>s)
CO
OK /ERROR
+EPCLK? +EPCLK:<BitClk>
OK /ERROR
+EPCLK=<state><sync_type><BitClk> OK /ERROR

L218 AT DOCUMENT
24.5.2 Field
<state>:PCM state
0 off
1 on
<sync_type>
0 short sync
1 long sync
<BitClk> : PCM bit clock
0 256 kHz
1 512 kHz
2 1024 kHz
3 2048 kHz
AL
Example
AT+ EPCLK=?
+ EPCLK: (0-1),(0-1), (0-3)
AT+ EPCLK? //Shows the current configuration
ID NQ
+ EPCLK:0, 1,1 // PCM state clk sync type
TI
OK
AT+ EPCLK =1,1,0 //Turn to PCM .
// sync type to long sync
N F LY
//set pcm bclk 256Khz

EN
OK
AT+ EPCLK?
+ EPCLK: 1,0,0 //pcm is on and short sync bclk 256
OK
Note: This configuration will not be saved to NVRAM
24.6 AT+ EARST Reset audio setting to factory setting
The command is used to recover audio setting to factory setting.
24.6.1 Format

CO
+EARST OK /ERROR
24.6.2 Field
Example
AT+ EARST

L218 AT DOCUMENT
OK //Recover audio parameters to factory settingNote: Setting Recovery won’t be valid

unless reset modem
24.6.3 Note
Make module have another chance to camp on network . For example, whenever a car, with a
module on it, is into an area that is without service of SIM1‘s operator, the module may activate SIM2
while deactivating SIM1, possibly getting service of SIM2‘s operator.
AL
ID NQ
TI
N F LY
EN
CO

L218 AT DOCUMENT
25 NVRAM AT Command
These commands are supported only on L216 project.
25.1 AT+ENVGETLID Query LID
Query LID according to custom NVRAM name.
25.1.1 Format
AL
+ENVGETLID=<”NVRAM name”> +ENVGETLID:<LID>,<total records>,<record
size>
OK /ERROR
ID NQ
25.1.2 Field
TI
N F LY
<"NVRAM name">:string type.

EN
NVRAM name
<LID>:short integer type.
NVRAM LID.
<total records>:short integer type.
Number of total records.
<record size>:short integer type.
Each record size.
Example
AT+ ENVGETLID=?
+ENVGETLID:<"NVRAM name">
OK
AT+ENVGETLID="tstconfig"
+ENVGETLID:180,1,1
OK
CO
25.1.3 Note
About how to custom NVRAM name , please refer to <M2M_NVRAM(Common AT

command).pptx> on the DMS.

L218 AT DOCUMENT
25.2 AT+ENVREAD Read NVRAM
Read specified NVRAM.
25.2.1 Format

+ENVREAD=? +EREADNV:(0-65535),(1-255)
OK /ERROR
+EREADNV=<LID>,<record index> +EREADNV:<record size>,<raw data>
OK /ERROR
AL
25.2.2 Field

ID NQ
NVRAM LID.
TI
<record index>:short integer type
Record index.
<record size>:short integer type.
N F LY
Each record size.

EN
<raw data>:string type, hex value.
Raw data read from NVRAM.
Example
AT+ENVREAD=?
+ENVREAD:(0-65535),(1-255)
OK
AT+ENVREAD=189,1
+EREADNV:1,"00"
OK
25.2.3 Note
N/A
CO
25.3 AT+ENVWRITE Write NVRAM
Write specified NVRAM.

L218 AT DOCUMENT
25.3.1 Format

+ENVWRITE=? +ENVWRITE:(0-65535),(0-255),<"raw data">
OK /ERROR
+ENVWRITE=<LID>,<record OK /ERROR
index>,<raw data>
25.3.2 Field

NVRAM LID.
AL
<record index>:short integer type
Record index.
<raw data>:string type, hex value.
ID NQ
Raw data read from NVRAM.
TI
Example
AT+ENVWRITE=?
+ENVWRITE:(0-65535),(0-255),<"raw data">
OK
N F LY
AT+ENVWRITE=189,1,"11"
EN
OK
AT+ENVWRITE=189,0 // if record index is 0, it will reset this NVRAM to be default value.
OK
25.3.3 Note
N/A
CO

L218 AT DOCUMENT
26 Compatible AT commands
Overview of Compatible AT Commands:
AT Command Description
AT+CIPMUX Start up multi-IP connection
AT+CSTT Start task and set APN, user name, password
AT+CIICR Bring up wireless connection with GPRS or CSD
AT+CIFSR Get local IP address
AT+CIPSTART Start up TCP or UDP connection
AT+CIPSEND Send data through TCP or UDP connection
AT+CIPCLOSE Close TCP or UDP connection
AL
AT+CIPSHUT Deactivate GPRS PDP context
AT+CIPSTATUS Query current connection status
AT+CIPRXGET Get data from network manually
ID NQ
AT+CALM TI Alert sound mode
AT+GSN Request TA Serial Number Identification (IMEI)
AT+CIPHEAD Add an IP Head at the Beginning of a Package Received
AT+CIPQSEND Select Data Transmitting Mode(no action)
N F LY
AT+SPEAKER Speaker and MIC select

EN
AT+SIDET Change the side tone gain level
26.1 AT+CIPMUX Start Up Multiple IP Connection
This command is used to start Up Multiple IP Connection or single IP Connection.

AT+CIPMUX=?
+CIPMUX: (0,1)
OK
CO

L218 AT DOCUMENT

AT+ CIPMUX?
+ CIPMUX: <multiple>
OK
Or
Error
AT+CIPMUX=<multiple>
OK
AL
Or
ERROR
Reference Note
ID NQ
TI Only in IP initial state, AT+CIPMUX=1 is effective;
Only when multi IP connection and GPRS application are
both shut down,
N F LY
AT+CIPMUX=0 is effective.
EN
<multiple> 0 Single IP connection

1 Multiple IP connection
26.2 AT+CSTT Start Task and Set APN, USER NAME, PASSWORD
This command is used to Start Task and Set APN, USER NAME, PASSWORD.
CO

AT+CSTT=?
+CSTT:"APN","USER","PWD"
OK

L218 AT DOCUMENT

AT+CSTT?
+CSTT: <APN>,<user name>,<password>
OK
AT+CSTT=<APN>,<user
name>,<password> OK
Or
ERROR
Execution Command Response
AL
AT+CSTT
OK
Or
ID NQ
Reference
TI ERROR
Note
N F LY
The write command and execution command of this

EN
command is valid only at the state of IP INITIAL. After this
command is executed, the state will be changed to IP
START.
<APN> A string parameter which indicates the GPRS access point name
<user name> A string parameter which indicates the GPRS user name
<password> A string parameter which indicates the GPRS password
CO
26.3 AT+CIICR Bring Up Wireless Connection with GPRS or CSD
This command is used to Bring Up Wireless Connection with GPRS or CSD..

L218 AT DOCUMENT

AT+CIICR=?
OK
AT+CIICR
OK
Or
ERROR
Reference Note
1. Max Response Time 85 seconds
AL
2. AT+CIICR only activates moving scene at the status of IP
START, after operating this Command is executed, the state
will be changed to IP CONFIG.
3. After module accepts the activated operation, if it is
ID NQ
TI activated successfully, module state will be changed to IP
GPRSACT, and it responds OK, otherwise it will respond
ERROR.
N F LY
EN
26.4 AT+CIFSR Get local IP address
This command is used to get local IP address..

AT+CIFSR=?
OK
AT+CIFSR
<IP address>
OK
Or
CO
ERROR
Reference Note
local IP Address can be obtained by AT+CIFSR, if module
hasn't valid IP, it will respond ERROR.

L218 AT DOCUMENT
<IP address> A string parameter which indicates the IP address assigned, for
example:
10.112.208.9
26.5 AT+CIPSTART Start TCP or UDP Connection
This command is used to start TCP or UDP Connection.

AT+CIPSTART=?
1) If AT+CIPMUX=0
AL
+CIPSTART:("TCP","UDP"),"(0,255).(0,255).(0,255)
.(0,255)","(1-65535)"
+CIPSTART:("TCP","UDP"),"DOMAIN
ID NQ
TI NAME","(1-65535)"
OK
2) If AT+CIPMUX=1
N F LY
EN
+CIPSTART:(0-5),("TCP","UDP"),"(0,255).(0,255).(0
,255).(0,255)",
"(1-65535)"
+CIPSTART: (0-5),("TCP","UDP"),"DOMAIN
NAME","(1-65535)"
OK
CO

L218 AT DOCUMENT
1)If single IP connection

(AT+CIPMUX=0)
AT+CIPSTART=<mode>,<IP
address or domain
name>,<port> OK
2)If multi-IP connection Or

(AT+CIPMUX=1)
AT+CIPSTART=<id>,<mode>, ERROR
< IP address or domain If already connected, will return:
name >,<port>
OK
AL
[<n>,]ALREADY CONNECT
Reference Note
ID NQ
TI This command allows establishment of a TCP/UDP
connection only when the state is IP INITIAL or IP
STATUS when it is in single state.
In multi-IP state, the state is in IP STATUS only. So it
is necessary to process "AT+CIPSHUT" before user
N F LY
establishes a TCP/UDP
EN
connection with this command when the state is not
IP INITIAL or IP STATUS.
When module is in multi-IP state, before this
command is executed, it is necessary to process
"AT+CSTT, AT+CIICR, AT+CIFSR".
<id> 0..5 A numeric parameter which indicates the connection

number
<mode> A string parameter which indicates the connection type
CO
"TCP" Establish a TCP connection

"UDP" Establish a UDP connection
<IP address or A string parameter which indicates remote server IP address, or
domain name > domain name.
<port> Remote server port

L218 AT DOCUMENT
<state> A string parameter which indicates the progress of connecting

IP INITIAL
CONNECT OK
In Multi-IP state:
IP INITIAL
CONNECT OK
AL
ID NQ
TI
N F LY
EN
CO

L218 AT DOCUMENT
26.6 AT+CIPSEND Send data through TCP or UDP connection
This command is used to send data through TCP or UDP connection.

AT+CIPSEND=?
1) For single IP connection (+CIPMUX=0)
+CIPSEND: (1-1460)
OK
2) For multi IP connection (+CIPMUX=1)
AL
+CIPSEND: (0-5),(1-1460)
ID NQ
OK
Read Command
AT+CIPSEND?
TI Response

+CIPSEND: <size>
N F LY
EN
OK
+CIPSEND: <n>,<size>
OK
CO

L218 AT DOCUMENT

If single IP is connected (+CIPMUX=0)
1) If single IP connection If connection is not established or module is
(AT+CIPMUX=0) disconnected:
AT+CIPSEND=<length>
If error is related to ME functionality:
2) If multi IP connection +CME ERROR <err>
(AT+CIPMUX=1)
AT+CIPSEND=<id>[,<length>] If sending is successful:
When +CIPQSEND=0
SEND OK
When +CIPQSEND=1
DATA ACCEPT:<length>
AL
If sending fails:
SEND FAIL
ID NQ
TI If multi IP connection is established
(+CIPMUX=1)
If connection is not established or module is
disconnected:
N F LY

EN
+CME ERROR <err>
If sending is successful:
<n>,SEND OK
If sending fails:
<id>,SEND FAIL
CO

L218 AT DOCUMENT

This Command is used to send changeable
AT+CIPSEND length data.
response">", then type data for send, If single IP connection is established
tap CTRL+Z to send, tap ESC to (+CIPMUX=0)
cancel the operation If connection is not established or module is
disconnected:
+CME ERROR <err>
If sending is successful:
SEND OK
If sending fails:
AL
SEND FAIL
ID NQ
Reference TI Note
This Command can only be used in single IP

connection mode
(+CIPMUX=0) and to send data on the TCP or
N F LY
UDP connection that has

EN
been established already. Ctrl-Z is used as a
termination symbol. ESC is
used to cancel sending data. There are at most
<size> bytes which can be
sent at a time.
<id> 0-5 A numeric parameter which indicates the connection number

<size> 1-1460 A numeric parameter which indicates the data length sent one time
CO
26.7 AT+CIPCLOSE Close TCP or UDP connection
This command is used to Close TCP or UDP Connection.

L218 AT DOCUMENT

AT+CIPCLOSE=?
OK

+CIPCLOSE: (0-5)
OK
If multi-IP connection For multi IP connection (+CIPMUX=1)

(AT +CIPMUX=1) <id>, CLOSE OK
AL
AT+CIPCLOSE=<id>

AT+CIPCLOSE
ID NQ
TI For single IP connection only (+CIPMUX=0):
If close is successfully:
CLOSE OK
N F LY
If close fails:
EN
ERROR
Reference Note
This command only closes connection at the status

of TCP/UDP which returns CONNECTING or
CONNECT OK, otherwise it will return ERROR,
after the connection is closed, the status is IP
CLOSE in single IP mode.

CO
26.8 AT+CIPSHUT Deactivate GPRS PDP Context
This command is used to deactivate GPRS PDP Context

L218 AT DOCUMENT

AT+CIPSHUT=?
OK
AT+CIPSHUT
If close is successful:
SHUT OK
If close fails:
ERROR
Or
Reference Note
AL
If this command is executed in multi-connection mode, all of
the IP connection will be shut.
User can close GPRS PDP context by AT+CIPSHUT. After
ID NQ
TI it is closed, the status is IP INITIAL.
If "+PDP: DEACT" URC is reported which means the GPRS
is released by the network, then user still needs to execute
"AT+CIPSHUT" command to make PDP context come back
to original state.
N F LY
EN
26.9 AT+CIPSTATUS Query Current Connection Status
This command is used to Query Current Connection Status.

AT+CIPSTATUS=?
OK
Or
+CIPSTATUS:(0-5)
OK

CO
If multi IP connection mode

(AT+CIPMUX=1) +CIPSTATUS: <id>,<bearer>, <TCP/UDP>, <IP address>,
<port>,<client state>
AT+CIPSTATUS=<id> OK

L218 AT DOCUMENT

AT+CIPSTATUS
1）If in single-IP mode (AT+CIPMUX=0)
+CIPSTATUS: 0,<bearer>, <TCP/UDP>, <IP address>,

<port>, <client state>
OK
2) If in multi-IP mode (AT+CIPMUX=1)

...
AL
OK
ID NQ
Reference TI Note

N F LY
EN
<bearer> 0-1 GPRS bearer, default is 0
<client state> INITIAL
CONNECTED
CLOSED
26.10 AT+CIPRXGET Get Data from Network Manually
This command is used to Get Data from Network Manually.

CO

L218 AT DOCUMENT

AT+CIPRXGET=?
If single IP connection (+CIPMUX=0)
+CIPRXGET: (list of supported <mode>s),
(list of supported <REQ length>)
OK
If multi IP connection (+CIPMUX=1)
+CIPRXGET: (list of supported <mode>s),
(list of supported <id>s),
(list of supported <REQ length>)
OK
AT+CIPRXGET?
AL
+CIPRXGET: <mode>
OK
ID NQ
TI
N F LY
EN
CO

L218 AT DOCUMENT
1) If single IP connection OK
(+CIPMUX=0)
AT+CIPRXGET=<mode>[,<REQ Or
length >]
ERROR
2) If multi IP connection
(+CIPMUX=1) 1)For single IP connection
AT+CIPRXGET=<mode>[,<id>,<R If “AT+CIPSRIP=1” is set, IP address and port are
EQ length >] contained.
if <mode>=1
+CIPRXGET: 1[,<IP ADDRESS>:<PORT>]
if <mode>=2
AL
+CIPRXGET: 2,<REQ length>,<CNF length>[,<IP
ADDRESS>:<PORT>]
1234567890…
ID NQ
TI OK
if <mode>=3
+CIPRXGET: 3,<REQ length>,<CNF length>[,<IP
ADDRESS>:<PORT>]
5151…
N F LY
OK
EN
2)For multi IP connection
if <mode>=1
+CIPRXGET: 1[,<id>,<IP ADDRESS>:<PORT>]
if <mode>=2
+CIPRXGET: 2,<id>,<REQ length>,<CNF
length>[,<IP
ADDRESS>:<PORT>]
1234567890…
OK
if <mode>=3
+CIPRXGET: 3,<id>,<REQ length>,<CNF
length>[,<IP
ADDRESS>:<PORT>]
5151…
CO
OK
+CME ERROR: <err>
Reference Note
To enable this function, parameter <mode> must be
set to 1 before connection.

L218 AT DOCUMENT
<mode> 0 Disable getting data from network manually, the module is set to
normal mode, data will be pushed to TE directly.
1 Enable getting data from network manually.
2 The module can get data, but the length of output data can't
exceed 1460 bytes at a time.
3 Similar to mode 2, but in HEX mode, which means the module can
get 730 bytes maximum at a time.
<id> A numeric parameter which indicates the connection number
<REQ length> Requested number of data bytes (1-1460 bytes)to be read
AL
<CNF length> Confirmed number of data bytes to be read, which may be less than
<length>. 0 indicates that no data can be read.
26.11 AT+CALM Alert sound mode

ID NQ
Test Command
TI
This command is used to set alert sound mode.
Response
AT+CALM=?
N F LY
+CALM: (0-1)
EN
OK

AT+CALM?
+ CALM: <mode>
OK
Or
Error
AT+CALM=<mode>
CO
OK
Or
ERROR
Reference Note

L218 AT DOCUMENT
<mode> 0 Normal mode

1 Silent mode (all sounds from ME are prevented)
Example:
Commands Response
AT+CALM=?
AL
+CALM: (0-1)
OK
AT+CALM?
ID NQ
TI +CALM: 1
OK
N F LY
EN
26.12 AT+GSN Request TA Serial Number Identification (IMEI)
This command is used to request TA Serial Number Identification (IMEI).

AT+GSN=?
OK

AT+GSN
<IMEI>
CO
OK
Or
Error
Reference Note

L218 AT DOCUMENT
26.13 AT+CIPHEAD Add an IP Head at the Beginning of a Package Received
This command is used to add an IP Head at the Beginning of a Package Received.

AT+CIPHEAD=?
+CIPHEAD: (0-1)
OK
AL
AT+CIPHEAD?
+ CIPHEAD: <mode>
ID NQ
TI OK
Or
Error
N F LY

EN
AT+CIPHEAD=<mode>
OK
Or
ERROR
Reference Note
CO
<mode> 0 Normal mode, Not add IP header

1 No effect also
26.14 AT+CIPQSEND Select Data Transmitting Mode
This command is used to select Data Transmitting Mode.

L218 AT DOCUMENT

AT+CIPQSEND=?
+CIPQSEND: (0-1)
OK

AT+CIPQSEND?
+ CIPQSEND: <n>
OK
Or
AL
Error
AT+CIPQSEND=<n>
ID NQ
TI OK
Or
N F LY
ERROR
EN
Reference Note
<n> 0 Normal mode,

1 No effect also.
26.15 AT+SPEAKER Speaker and MIC select

CO
This command is used to select speaker and MIC.

L218 AT DOCUMENT
This command is used to select Response

speaker and MIC.Test Command
AT+SPEAKER=? +SPEAKER: (0-1), (0-1)
OK

AT+SPEAKER?
+ SPEAKER: <speaker channel>,<MIC
channel>
OK
AL
Or
Error
ID NQ
AT+SPEAKER=<speaker
TI
channel>,<MIC channel> OK
Or
N F LY
EN
ERROR
Reference Note
<speaker channel> 0 speaker channel 0

1 speaker channel 1
<MIC channel> 0 MIC channel 0
1 MIC channel 1
CO
26.16 AT+SIDET Change the side tone gain level
This command is used to change the side tone gain level.

L218 AT DOCUMENT

AT+SIDET=?
+SIDET: (0-1), (0-16)
OK

AT+SIDET?
+ SIDET: <channel 0 level>,<channel 1 level>
OK
Or
AL
Error
AT+SIDET=<channel
ID NQ
number>,<channel n level>
TI OK
Or
N F LY
ERROR
EN
Reference Note
<channel number> 0 channel number 0

1 channel number 1
<channel n level> 0 -16 channel level (n refer to <channel number>)
Example:
CO
Commands Response
AT+SIDET=?
+SIDET: (0-1),(0-16)
OK
AT+SIDET=1,11
OK
L218 AT DOCUMENT
27 HTTP AT Commands
27.1 AT+HTTPPARA Set http parameter

The command is used to set http parameter.
Format
Command Possible Description

response(s)
AL
+HTTPPARA=<para>,<value> OK/ERROR
Field
<para>: string
url, target path
ID NQ
port, target port
TI
<value>: Corresponding to the value of url, the <para> parameter is the maximum of 128
bytes, url supports domain name resolution, the default value of port is 80
N F LY
EN
Example
[precondition]
[Case 1]
AT+HTTPPARA=url,www.baidu.com //set http url parameter
[Result]
OK
[Case 2]
AT+HTTPPARA=port,80 //set port //can ignore
CO
[Result]
OK
27.2 AT+HTTPSETUP HTTP link establishment

The command is used to create HTTP link.
L218 AT DOCUMENT
Format
+HTTPSETUP OK/ERROR The correct destination
address and port can be
established successfully.
Field
null
Example
[precondition]
[Case 1]
AL
AT+HTTPSETUP //creating HTTP link
[Result]
OK
ID NQ
TI
N F LY
EN
27.3 AT+HTTPACTION Sending HTTP request
The command is used to send HTTP request.
Format
Command Pos Description

sible
+HTTPACTION=<mode>,[<length>],[<string>] OK/ERROR
Field
CO
<mode>: int
0, HTTP GET request
1, HTTP HEAD request
2,HTTP POST request
99,OTHER request
<length>:
Maxium 2048,length of HTTP POST request body.
<string>:
L218 AT DOCUMENT
Value of HTTP POST request body OR other request content.
Example
[precondition]
[Case 1]
AT+HTTPACTION=0 //send HTTP GET request
[Result]
OK
+HTTPRECV:
AL
HTTP/1.1 200 OK
Date: Fri, 11 Sep 2015 05:21:54 GMT
Content-Type: image/jpeg
ID NQ
Content-Length: 6
TI
Connection: close
ETag: "2815057560"
Last-Modified: Wed, 09 Sep 2015 01:33:59 GMT
Expires: Fri, 11 Sep 2015 05:22:54 GMT
N F LY
Cache-Control: max-age=60
EN
Lfy: st01.i6
Accept-Ranges: bytes
 123456
[Case 2]
AT+HTTPACTION=1 //send HTTP HEAD request
[Result]
OK
+HTTPRECV:
HTTP/1.1 200 OK
Date: Fri, 11 Sep 2015 05:25:57 GMT
Content-Type: image/jpeg
Content-Length: 24794
CO
Connection: close
ETag: "2815057560"
Last-Modified: Wed, 09 Sep 2015 01:33:59 GMT
Expires: Fri, 11 Sep 2015 05:26:57 GMT
Cache-Control: max-age=60
Lfy: cq02.i4
Accept-Ranges: bytes

L218 AT DOCUMENT
[Case 3]
AT+HTTPACTION=2,6,123456 //send HTTP POST request
[Result]
OK
+HTTPRECV:
HTTP/1.1 200 OK
Date: Fri, 11 Sep 2015 05:25:57 GMT
…
[Case 4]
AT+HTTPACTION=99,GET http://www.baidu.com HTTP/1.1\r\nHOST: www.baidu.com\r\n\r\n
AL
[Result]
OK
ID NQ
TI
27.4 AT+HTTPCLOSE Close HTTP link
N F LY
The command is used to close HTTP link

EN
Format
Command Possible Description
response(s)
+HTTPCLSOE OK/ERROR
Field
null
Example
[precondition]
CO
[Case 1]
AT+HTTPCLOSE //close HTTP link
[Result]
OK

L218 AT DOCUMENT
28 AUDIO AT Commands
28.1 AT+ZAUDREC Audio function

The command is used to audio function.
Format
Format
return statu
AL
<CR><LF>OK<CR><LF> succes
AT+ZAUDREC=<Mode>[,<Fil
s
ename>]
<CR><LF>ERROR<CR><LF> failed
ID NQ
AT+ZAUDREC? +ZAUDREC:<Files_number>,<File_name1>,<le succes
AT+ZAUDREC=?
TI n1> ,<File_name2>,<len2>
<CR><LF>OK<CR><LF>
+ZAUDREC: (0-6)
s
succes
<CR><LF><OK><CR><LF> s
N F LY
EN
Field
0 Start record
1 stop record
2 Play record
Mode 3 Stop play record
4 Delete record
5 Start record in call
6 Stop record in call
Record file name, do not need suffix，suffix is wav，if mode is 0、2、
< Filename >
4、5 时，this field is valid，if 0、2、5do not have this field，default
name is rec
<Files_number> File number
<len> File size
CO
Example
[precondition]
[Case 1]
L218 AT DOCUMENT
AT+zaudrec = 0 [, "rec"]
[Result]
OK
[Case 2]
AT+zaudrec = 1
[Result]
OK
[Case 3]
AL
AT+zaudrec = 2 [, "rec"]
[Result]
ID NQ
OK
[Case 4]
TI
AT+zaudrec = 3
N F LY
EN
[Result]
OK
[Case 5]
AT+zaudrec = 4, "rec"
[Result]
OK
[Case 6]
AT+zaudrec = 5, "rec"
CO
[Result]
OK
[Case 7]
AT+zaudrec = 6
[Result]

L218 AT DOCUMENT
OK
[Case 8]
AT+zaudrec?
[Result]
+zaudrec: 1, rec.wav, 66332
AL
ID NQ
TI
N F LY
EN
CO

L218 AT DOCUMENT
29 FTP AT Commands
29.1 AT+FTPPORT Set FTP Control Port

The command is used to set ftp control port.
Format
Format return
AT+FTPPORT=? OK
AT+FTPPORT? +FTPPORT: <value>
OK
AL
AT+FTPPORT= OK
<value>
ID NQ
Field
Example
TI
<value> The value of FTP Control port, from 1 to 65535. Default value is 21
N F LY
[precondition]
EN
[Case 1]
AT+FTPPORT=21
[Result]
OK
29.2 AT+FTPMODE Set Active or Passive FTP Mode

The command is used to set ftp mode active or passive.
CO
Format
Format return
AT+FTPMODE=? OK
AT+ FTPMODE? + FTPMODE: <value>
OK
AT+FTPMODE =<value> OK

L218 AT DOCUMENT
Field
<value>
0 Active FTP mode
1 Passive FTP mode
Example
[precondition]
[Case 1]
AT+FTPMODE=1
[Result]
OK
AL
ID NQ
29.3 AT+FTPTYPE TI Set the Type of Data to Be Transferred
The command is used to set the Type of Data to Be Transferred
Format
N F LY
Format return
EN
AT+ FTPTYPE=? OK
AT+ FTPTYPE? + FTPTYPE: <value>
OK
AT+ OK
FTPTYPE=<value>
Field
<value>
"A" For FTP ASCII sessions
"I" For FTP Binary sessions
Example
CO
[precondition]
[Case 1]
AT+FTPTYPE ="A"
[Result]
OK

L218 AT DOCUMENT
29.4 AT+FTPPUTOPT Set FTP Put Type

The command is used to set FTP Put Type
Format
Format return
AT+ FTPPUTOPT=? OK
AT+ FTPPUTOPT? +FTPPUTOPT:
<value>
OK
AT+FTPPUTOPT OK
AL
=<value>
Field
ID NQ
<value> TI
"APPE" For appending file
"STOU" For storing unique file
"STOR" For storing file
N F LY
EN
Example
[precondition]
[Case 1]
AT+ FTPPUTOPT ="STOU"
[Result]
OK
29.5 AT+FTPREST Set Resume Broken Download

CO
The command is used to set Resume Broken Download
Format
Format return
AT+ FTPREST=? OK
AT+ FTPREST? + FTPREST: <value>
OK
L218 AT DOCUMENT
AT+ FTPREST OK
=<value>
Field
<value>
Broken point to be resumed
Example
[precondition]
[Case 1]
AL
AT+ FTPREST =100
[Result]
ID NQ
OK
TI
29.6 AT+FTPSERV Set FTP Server Address
N F LY
EN
The command is used to set FTP Server Address
Format
Format return
AT+ FTPSERV =? OK
AT+ FTPSERV? + FTPSERV: <value>
OK
AT+FTPSERV OK
=<value>
Field
<value>
32-bit number in dotted-decimal notation (i.e.xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx) or alphanumeric ASCII
text string up to 49 characters if DNS is available
CO
Example
[precondition]
[Case 1]
AT+FTPSERV="182.150.28.206"

L218 AT DOCUMENT
[Result]
OK
29.7 AT+FTPUN set FTP User Name

The command is used to set FTP User Name
Format
Format return
AT+ FTPUN=? OK
AL
AT+ FTPUN? + FTPUN: <value>
OK
AT+ FTPUN =<value> OK
ID NQ
Field
<value>
TI
Alphanumeric ASCII text string up to 49 characters.
N F LY
Example
EN
[precondition]
[Case 1]
AT+ FTPUN ="cd_ftp"
[Result]
OK
29.8 AT+FTPPW Set FTP Password

CO
The command is used to Set FTP Password
Format
Format return
AT+ FTPPW =? OK
AT+ FTPPW? + FTPPW: <value>
OK
L218 AT DOCUMENT
AT+ FTPPW =<value> OK
Field
<value>
Alphanumeric ASCII text string up to 49 characters.
Example
[precondition]
[Case 1]
AT+ FTPPW ="cd_ftp"
AL
[Result]
OK
ID NQ
TI
29.9 AT+FTPGETNAME Set Download File Name
N F LY
EN
Format
Format return
AT+ FTPGETNAME =? OK
AT+ FTPGETNAME? + FTPGETNAME:
<value>
OK
AT+FTPGETNAME=<value> OK
Field
<value>
Alphanumeric ASCII text string up to 99 characters
Example
CO
[precondition]
[Case 1]
AT+ FTPGETNAME ="test.txt"
[Result]

L218 AT DOCUMENT
OK
29.10 AT+FTPGETPATH Set Download File Path

The command is used to Set Download File Path
Format
Format return
AT+ FTPGETPATH =? OK
AT+ FTPGETPATH? + FTPGETPATH:
<value>
OK
AL
AT+FTPGETPATH=<value> OK
Field
ID NQ
<value> TI
Example
N F LY
EN
[precondition]
[Case 1]
AT+ FTPGETPATH ="/"
[Result]
OK
29.11 AT+ FTPPUTNAME Set Upload File Name

The command is used to set Upload File Name
Format
CO
Format return
AT+ FTPPUTNAME=? OK
AT+ FTPPUTNAME? + FTPPUTNAME:
<value>
OK
AT+FTPPUTNAME=<value> OK

L218 AT DOCUMENT
Field
<value>
Example
[precondition]
[Case 1]
AT+ FTPPUTNAME ="deng.txt"
[Result]
OK
AL
29.12 AT+FTPPUTPATH Set Upload File Path
ID NQ
TI
The command is used to set Upload File Path
Format
Format return
N F LY
AT+ FTPPUTPATH =? OK
EN
AT+ FTPPUTPATH? + FTPPUTPATH:
<value>
OK
AT+FTPPUTPATH=<value> OK
Field
<value>
Example
[precondition]
CO
[Case 1]
AT+ FTPPUTPATH ="/"
[Result]
OK

L218 AT DOCUMENT
29.13 AT+FTPGET Download File

The command is used to download File
Format
Format return
AT+ FTPGET =? OK
AT+FTPGET=<mode>[,<reqlength>] If mode is 1 and it is a
successful FTP get
session:
OK
+FTPGET:1,1
If data transfer finished:
+FTPGET:1,0
AL
If mode is 1 and it is a
failed FTP get session:
OK
ID NQ
TI +FTPGET:1,<error>
If mode is 2:
+FTPGET:2,<cnflength>
012345678…
OK
N F LY
EN
Field
<mode>
1 For opening FTP get session
2 For reading FTP download data.
<reqlength>
Requested number of data bytes (1-1460)to be read
<cnflength>
Confirmed number of data bytes to be read, which may be less than <length>. 0
indicates that no data can be read.
<error>
61 Net error
62 DNS error
63 Connect error
64 Timeout
CO
65 Server error
66 Operation not allow
70 Replay error
71 User error
72 Password error
73 Type error
74 Rest error

L218 AT DOCUMENT
75 Passive error
76 Active error
77 Operate error
78 Upload error
79 Download error
80 File error
86 Manual quit
Timeout：60 seconds
Example
[precondition]
AL
[Case 1]
AT+ FTPGET =1
ID NQ
[Result]
OK
TI
+FTPGET:1,1
N F LY
EN
[Case 2]
AT+FTPGET=2,1024
+FTPGET: 2,50
01234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789
OK
+FTPGET:1,0
29.14 AT+FTPPUT Set Upload File

The command is used to set Upload File
CO
Format
Format return
AT+ FTPPUT =? OK
AT+FTPPUT=<mode>[,<reqlength>] If mode is 1 and it is a
successful FTP get session:
OK

L218 AT DOCUMENT
+FTPPUT:1,1,<maxlength>
If mode is 1 and it is a failed
FTP get session:
OK
+FTPPUT:1,<error>
If mode is 2 and <reqlength>
is not 0
+FTPPUT:2,<cnflength>
…… //Input data
OK
If mode is 2 and <reqlength>
is 0, it will respond OK, and
FTP session will
be closed
AL
OK
If data transfer finished.
+FTPPUT:1,0
ID NQ
Field
<mode>
TI
1 For opening FTP put session
N F LY
2 For writing FTP upload data.

EN
<reqlength>
Requested number of data bytes(0-<maxlength>) to be transmitted
<cnflength>
Confirmed number of data bytes to be transmitted
<maxlength>
The max. length of data can be sent at a time. It depends on the network status.
<error> See "AT+FTPGET"
Timeout：60 seconds
Example
[precondition]
CO
[Case 1]
AT+ FTPPUT =1
[Result]
OK
+ FTPPUT:1,1

L218 AT DOCUMENT
[Case 2]
AT+ FTPPUT=2,1024
[intdata]
01234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789
ctrl+z
[Result]
+ FTPPUT:1,0
OK
AL
29.15 AT+FTPSCONT Save FTP Application Context
The command is used to save FTP Application Context
ID NQ
Format
TI Format
AT+ FTPSCONT=? OK
return
AT+ FTPSCONT? +FTPSERV: <value>

N F LY
+FTPPORT: <value>
EN
+FTPUN: <value>
+FTPPW: <value>
+FTPMODE: <value>
+FTPTYPE: <value>
+FTPPUTOPT:
<value>
+FTPREST: <value>
+FTPGETNAME:
<value>
+FTPGETPATH:
<value>
+FTPPUTNAME:
<value>
+FTPPUTPATH:
CO
<value>
+FTPTIMEOUT:
<value>
+FTPCID: <value>
OK
AT+
FTPSCONT=<value>

L218 AT DOCUMENT
Field
<value>
1 save ftp application context to file
2 read ftp context to system
Example
[precondition]
[Case 1]
AT+ FTPSCONT?
AL
[Result]
ID NQ
+FTPSERV: <182.150.28.206>
+FTPPORT:<2100>
+FTPUN: <cd_ftp>
+FTPPW:<cd_ftp>
TI
+FTPMODE:<1>
N F LY
+FTPTYPE:<I>
EN
+FTPPUTOPT:<STOU>
+FTPREST:<0>
+FTPGETNAME:<deng1.txt>
+FTPGETPATH:</>
+FTPPUTNAME:<deng1.txt>
FTPPUTPATH:</>
FTPCID:<0>
OK
[Case 2]
AT+ FTPSCONT=1
[Result]
CO
OK
[Case 3]
AT+ FTPSCONT=2
[Result]
OK

L218 AT DOCUMENT
29.16 AT+FTPDELE Delete Specified File in FTP Server

The command is used to delete Specified File in FTP Server
Format
Format return
AL
AT+ FTPDELE=? OK
AT+ FTPDELE OK
ID NQ
Field TI
The file to be deleted is specified by the "AT+FTPGETNAME" and"AT+FTPGETPATH"
commands.
N F LY
Example
EN
[precondition]
[Case 1]
AT+ FTPDELE
[Result]
OK
29.17 AT+FTPSIZE Get the Size of Specified File in FTP Server

The command is used to get the Size of Specified File in FTP Server
CO
Format
Format return
AT+ FTPSIZE =? OK
AT+ FTPSIZE If successed:
OK
+FTPSIZE:1,0,<size>
If failed:

L218 AT DOCUMENT
OK
+FTPSIZE:1,<error>,<0>
Field
<error> See "AT+FTPGET"
<size> The file size. Unit: byte
The file is specified by the "AT+FTPGETNAME" and "AT+FTPGETPATH" commands.
Example
[precondition]
[Case 1]
AL
AT+ FTPSIZE
[Result]
ID NQ
OK
TI
+FTPSIZE: 1,0,300
29.18 AT+FTPSTATE Get the FTP State

N F LY
EN
The command is used to get the FTP State
Format
Format return
AT+ FTPSTATE =? OK
AT+ FTPSTATE +FTPSTATE: <state>
OK
Field
<state>
0 idle
1 in the FTP session, including FTPGET, FTPPUT, FTPDELE and FTPSIZE
operation.
CO
Example
[precondition]
[Case 1]
AT+ FTPSTATE

L218 AT DOCUMENT
[Result]
+FTPSTATE: 0
OK
29.19 AT+FTPMKD Make Directory on the Remote Machine

The command is used to make Directory on the Remote Machine
Format
Format return
AT+ FTPMKD=? OK
AL
AT+ FTPMKD OK
If success:
OK
ID NQ
TI +FTPMKD: 1,0
If failed:
OK
+FTPMKD: 1,<error>
N F LY
Field
EN
<error> See “AT+FTPGET”
The created folder is specified by the “AT+FTPGETPATH” command.
Example
[precondition]
[Case 1]
AT+ FTPMKD
[Result]
OK
+FTPMKD: 1,0
CO
29.20 AT+FTPRMD Remove Directory on the Remote Machine

The command is used to remove Directory on the Remote Machine
Format
Format return

L218 AT DOCUMENT
AT+ FTPRMD=? OK
AT+ FTPRMD If success:
OK
+FTPRMD: 1,0
If failed:
OK
+FTPRMD: 1,<error>
Field
The removed folder is specified by the “AT+FTPGETPATH” command.
Example
AL
[precondition]
[Case 1]
ID NQ
AT+ FTPRMD TI
[Result]
OK
+FTPRMD: 1,0
N F LY
EN
29.21 AT+FTPLIST Set the Type of Data to Be Transferred
Format
Format return
AT+ FTPLIST=? OK
AT+ FTPLIST? + FTPLIST: <value>
OK
AT+FTPLIST=<mode>[,<reqlength>] If mode is 1 and it is a
successful FTP get
session:
OK
CO
+FTPLIST: 1,1
If data transfer is
finished:
+FTPLIST: 1,0
If mode is 1 and it is a
failed FTP get session:
OK

L218 AT DOCUMENT
+FTPLIST: 1,<error>
If mode is 2:
+FTPLIST:
2,<cnflength>
012345678…
OK
Field
<mode>
1 For opening FTP get file list session
2 For reading FTP file list
<reqlength> Requested number of data bytes (1-1460) to be read
<cnflength> Confirmed number of data bytes to be read, which may be less than
<reqlength>. 0 indicates that no data can be read.
AL
ID NQ
Example
[precondition]
TI
[Case 1]
N F LY
AT+ FTPLIST =1
EN
[Result]
OK
+ FTPLIST:1,1
[Case 2]
AT+ FTPLIST=2,1024
+FTPLIST: 2,50
2016/08/25 19:20 <DIR> .
2016/08/25 19:20 <DIR> ..
2015/11/04 16:39 <DIR> .android
2016/09/06 18:37 1,164 .bash_history
CO
2015/10/28 15:39 <DIR> .config

2016/01/12 18:06 360 .gitconfig
2016/07/25 17:11 <DIR> .oracle_jre_usage
2016/07/27 17:23 <DIR> .ssh
2016/07/07 13:32 <DIR> .VirtualBox
2015/12/16 16:16 4,425 aaa
2016/03/10 15:36 16,740 aaa.txt

L218 AT DOCUMENT
2016/03/16 16:21 10,425 aaaaaffdf.txt

2016/04/26 19:07 <DIR> AppData
2016/03/18 10:21 12,065 bing.txt
OK
+FTPLIST:1,0
29.22 AT+FTPGETTOFS Download File and Save in File System

The command is used to download File and Save in File System
AL
Format
Format return
AT+ FTPGETTOFS=? OK
ID NQ
AT+ FTPGETTOFS?
TI +FTPGETTOFS:
<status>, <filename>
AT+FTPGETTOFS=<loc>,<filename> OK
N F LY
Field
EN
<status> the process status of downloading and saving File to File System through FTP
0 not in the process
1 during the process
<loc> file saved in ROM or SD card.

0 saved in ROM
1 saved in SD card
<filename> file name. Alphanumeric ASCII text string up to 64 characters
Example
[precondition]
CO
[Case 1]
at+ftpgettofs=0,"aa.txt"
[Result]
OK
+FTPGETTOFS: 0,174125

L218 AT DOCUMENT
29.23 AT+FTPPUTFRMFS Upload File from File System.

The command is used to upload File from File System.
Format
Format return
AT+ FTPPUTFRMFS =? OK
AT+ FTPPUTFRMFS? + FTPPUTFRMFS: <filename>
OK
AT+FTPPUTFRMFS=<filename> If it is a successful FTP put
session:
OK
AL
If data transfer finished.
+FTPPUTFRMFS:
0,<totalLength>
ID NQ
TI If it is a failed FTP put session:
OK
+FTPPUTFRMFS: <error>
Field
N F LY
<filename> file name. Alphanumeric ASCII text string up to 64 characters

EN
Example
[precondition]
[Case 1]
AT+ FTPPUTFRMFS ="deng1.txt"
[Result]
OK
+FTPPUTFRMFS: 0,552
CO
29.24 AT+FTPQUIT Quit Current FTP Session

The command is used to quit Current FTP Session
Format
Format return

L218 AT DOCUMENT
AT+ FTPQUIT=? OK
AT+ FTPQUIT OK
Field
null
Example
[precondition]
[Case 1]
AT+ FTPQUIT
AL
[Result]
OK
ID NQ
TI
N F LY
29.25 AT+SAPBR Set the info about ftp and active ftp pdp
EN
context
The command is used to set the info about ftp and active ftp pdp context
Format
Format return
AT+ SAPBR =? OK
AT+ SAPBR? + SAPBR: <value>
OK
AT+SAPBR=<cmd_type>,<cid>[,<ConPa OK
ramTag>,<ConParamValue>] If<cmd_type> = 2
+SAPBR:
<cid>,<Status>,<IP_Addr>
OK
CO
If <cmd_type>=4
+SAPBR:
<ConParamTag>,<ConPara
mValue>
OK
Field

L218 AT DOCUMENT
<cmd_type>
0 Close bearer
1 Open bearer
2 Query bearer
3 Set bearer parameters
4 Get bearer parameters
<cid> Bearer profile identifier
<Status>
0 Bearer is connecting
1 Bearer is connected
2 Bearer is closing
3 Bearer is closed
<ConParamTag> Bearer parameter
"CONTYPE" Type of Internet connection. Value refer to
AL
<ConParamValue_ConType>
"APN" Access point name string: maximum 64
characters
ID NQ
"USER" User name string: maximum 32 characters
TI
"PWD" Password string: maximum 32 characters
"PHONENUM" Phone number for CSD call
"RATE" CSD connection rate. For value refer to
<ConParamValue_Rate>
N F LY
<ConParamValue> Bearer paramer value

EN
<ConParamValue_Rate>
0 2400
1 4800
2 9600
3 14400
<IP_Addr> The IP address of bearer
Example
[precondition]
[Case 1]
at+sapbr=3,1,"apn","cmnet"
CO
[Result]
OK
[Case 2]
at+sapbr=1,1

L218 AT DOCUMENT
[Result]
OK
AL
ID NQ
TI
N F LY
EN
CO

L218 at Document V1.0

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

L218 at Document V1.0

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

L218 at Document V1.0

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

L218 AT DOCUMENT

GSM/GPRS+GNSS Module Series

Shanghai MobiletekCommunication Ltd

APPLICABLE LAWS, NO WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND, EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED,

Copyright© Shanghai MobiletekCommunication Ltd 1

Date Version Description of chage Author

2016-9-29 V1.0 Initial Chen Lei

Copyright© Shanghai MobiletekCommunication Ltd 2

1.1 Overview ..................................................................................................................................................15

1.2 References ...............................................................................................................................................15

2 V.25ter AT Commands ....................................................................................................................... 16

2.1 ATA ...........................................................................................................................................................16

2.3 ATE ...........................................................................................................................................................18

2.4 ATH ..........................................................................................................................................................18

2.7 ATO ..........................................................................................................................................................20

2.8 ATP ...........................................................................................................................................................21

2.10 ATS0 .........................................................................................................................................................22

2.11 ATS3 .........................................................................................................................................................22

2.12 ATS4 .........................................................................................................................................................23

2.13 ATS5 .........................................................................................................................................................24

2.14 ATS6 .........................................................................................................................................................24

2.15 ATS7 .........................................................................................................................................................24

2.16 ATS8 .........................................................................................................................................................25

2.17 ATS10 .......................................................................................................................................................25

2.18 ATT ...........................................................................................................................................................26

2.19 ATV ...........................................................................................................................................................26

2.20 ATX ...........................................................................................................................................................27

2.21 ATZ ...........................................................................................................................................................28

2.22 AT&F ........................................................................................................................................................28

2.23 AT+GMI ....................................................................................................................................................29

Copyright© Shanghai MobiletekCommunication Ltd 3

2.24 AT+GMM .................................................................................................................................................29

2.27 AT+IFC Set TE-TA Local Data Flow Control .........................................................................................30

2.28 AT+GCAP ..................................................................................................................................................31

3 General commands ............................................................................................................................ 32

3.1 AT+CGMI Request manufacturer identification ................................................................................32

3.2 AT+CGMM Request model identification ...........................................................................................32

3.3 AT+CGMR Request revision identification .........................................................................................32

3.4 AT+CGSN Request product serial number identification ..................................................................33

3.6 AT+CLAC List all available AT commands...........................................................................................34

3.7 AT+CIMI Request international mobile subscriber identity ..............................................................34

AT+CSTA Select type of address ..........................................................................................................36

4.2 AT+CHUP Hang up call ........................................................................................................................36

4.4 AT+CR Service reporting control .........................................................................................................38

4.5 AT+CEER Extended error report ..........................................................................................................39

4.6 AT+CRC Cellular result code ................................................................................................................39

4.7 AT+CSNS Single Numbering Scheme ..................................................................................................40

4.8 AT+CVHU Voice Hangup Control ........................................................................................................41

5 Network Service related commands .................................................................................................. 42

5.1 AT+CNUM Subscriber Number ............................................................................................................42

5.2 AT+CREG Network Registration ..........................................................................................................42

5.3 AT+COPS Operator Selection ..............................................................................................................43

5.4 AT+CLCK Facility Lock ..........................................................................................................................45

5.5 AT+CPWD Change Password ..............................................................................................................46

5.6 AT+CLIP Calling line identification presentation................................................................................47

5.7 AT+CLIR Calling line identification restriction ....................................................................................48

5.8 AT+COLP Connected line identification presentation........................................................................48

Copyright© Shanghai MobiletekCommunication Ltd 4

5.9 AT+CCUG Closed user group ...............................................................................................................49